Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                

Jde 920 Address Book

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 278
At a glance
Powered by AI
The document provides an implementation guide for the Address Book module in JD Edwards EnterpriseOne, which allows users to set up names, addresses, and contact information for customers, suppliers, and other entities.

The document aims to describe the Address Book module and discuss how to set up the Address Book system in JD Edwards EnterpriseOne.

The document covers setting up the Address Book system as well as copyright information and a glossary of key terms related to JD Edwards EnterpriseOne.

JD

[1] Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications


Address Book Implementation Guide
Release 9.2
E63885-02

October 2015
Describes the Address Book module, and discusses how to
set up the Address Book system to set up names, addresses,
and phone numbers for customers, suppliers, companies and
so on.
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide, Release 9.2

E63885-02

Copyright 2014, 2015, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on
use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your
license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license,
transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse
engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is
prohibited.

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If
you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.

If this is software or related documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it
on behalf of the U.S. Government, then the following notice is applicable:

U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS: Oracle programs, including any operating system, integrated software,
any programs installed on the hardware, and/or documentation, delivered to U.S. Government end users
are "commercial computer software" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and
agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and
adaptation of the programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on
the hardware, and/or documentation, shall be subject to license terms and license restrictions applicable to
the programs. No other rights are granted to the U.S. Government.

This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management
applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including
applications that may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous
applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other
measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages
caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.

Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of
their respective owners.

Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks
are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. AMD,
Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced
Micro Devices. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.

This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information about content,
products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and
expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services
unless otherwise set forth in an applicable agreement between you and Oracle. Oracle Corporation and its
affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of
third-party content, products, or services, except as set forth in an applicable agreement between you and
Oracle.
Contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................................. xi
Audience....................................................................................................................................................... xi
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Products ....................................................................................................... xi
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Application Fundamentals ....................................................................... xi
Documentation Accessibility ..................................................................................................................... xi
Related Information ................................................................................................................................... xii
Conventions ................................................................................................................................................ xii

1 Introduction to JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book


1.1 Understanding JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book ................................................. 1-1
1.1.1 Address Book Reporting..................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Integrating JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book With the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Systems 1-2
1.3 Implementing the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book............................................. 1-3
1.3.1 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book Implementation Steps .............................. 1-3
1.4 Business Interface Integration Objects ..................................................................................... 1-4

2 Setting Up the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book System


2.1 Understanding JD Edwards Address Book Setup Requirements ....................................... 2-1
2.2 Setting Up User-Defined Codes................................................................................................ 2-2
2.3 Setting Up Category Codes ....................................................................................................... 2-5
2.4 Setting Up Constants .................................................................................................................. 2-7
2.4.1 Understanding Address Book Constants......................................................................... 2-7
2.4.1.1 Symbol to Identify Address Book Records ............................................................... 2-7
2.4.1.2 Address by Effective Date ........................................................................................... 2-8
2.4.1.3 Electronic Mail Security............................................................................................... 2-8
2.4.1.4 Personal Data Security ................................................................................................. 2-8
2.4.2 Understanding Country Constants................................................................................... 2-9
2.4.2.1 Mailing Formats............................................................................................................ 2-9
2.4.2.2 Default Country Format .............................................................................................. 2-9
2.4.2.3 Predefined Mailing Formats .................................................................................... 2-10
2.4.3 Prerequisite ........................................................................................................................ 2-12
2.4.4 Forms Used to Set Up Constants.................................................................................... 2-12
2.4.5 Setting Up Address Book Constants.............................................................................. 2-12
2.4.6 Setting Up Country Constants........................................................................................ 2-13

iii
2.4.6.1 Country Code Fields ................................................................................................. 2-14
2.5 Setting Up an Audit Log ......................................................................................................... 2-15
2.5.1 Understanding the Audit Log......................................................................................... 2-15
2.5.2 Form Used to Set Up an Audit Log................................................................................ 2-15
2.5.3 Setting Up an Address Book Audit Log........................................................................ 2-16
2.6 Setting Up Next Numbers ...................................................................................................... 2-16
2.6.1 Form Used to Set Up Next Numbers ............................................................................. 2-16
2.6.2 Setting Up Address Book Next Numbers ..................................................................... 2-16
2.7 Setting Up Postal Codes.......................................................................................................... 2-17
2.7.1 Understanding Postal Codes........................................................................................... 2-17
2.7.2 Form Used to Set Up Postal Codes ................................................................................ 2-17
2.7.3 Setting Up Address Book Postal Codes......................................................................... 2-17
2.8 Setting Up Supplemental Data............................................................................................... 2-17
2.8.1 Prerequisites ...................................................................................................................... 2-17
2.8.2 Forms Used to Set Up Supplemental Data.................................................................... 2-18
2.8.3 Setting Up Supplemental Data for Address Book ....................................................... 2-18

3 Setting Up Parent/Child Relationships and Organizational Structures


3.1 Setting Up Parent/Child Relationships................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Understanding Parent/Child Relationships ................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Forms Used to Create Parent/Child Relationships ........................................................ 3-2
3.1.3 Setting Processing Options for Structure Revisions (P0150) ......................................... 3-2
3.1.3.1 Process............................................................................................................................ 3-2
3.1.3.2 Defaults .......................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.4 Setting Processing Options for Structure Inquiry (P02150)........................................... 3-3
3.1.4.1 Defaults .......................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.5 Creating Parent/Child Relationships ............................................................................... 3-3
3.1.6 Reviewing Parent/Child Relationships ........................................................................... 3-4
3.2 Setting Up Tiers for Parent/Child Organizational Structures ............................................. 3-5
3.2.1 Understanding Tiers for Parent/Child Organizational Structures .............................. 3-5
3.2.2 Prerequisite ........................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.2.3 Forms Used to Set Up Tiers for Parent/Child Organizational Structures .................. 3-6
3.2.4 Building an Organizational Structure Using Tiers ......................................................... 3-7
3.2.5 Determining the Root Parent in an Organizational Structure as of a Specific Date .. 3-7
3.2.6 Entering Tier Descriptions for an Organizational Structure ......................................... 3-8
3.3 Setting Up Enhanced Parent/Child Relationships ................................................................ 3-8
3.3.1 Understanding Enhanced Parent/Child Relationships ................................................. 3-8
3.3.2 Prerequisite ........................................................................................................................... 3-8
3.3.3 Form Used to Set Up Enhanced Parent/Child Relationships....................................... 3-9
3.3.4 Creating Enhanced Parent/Child Relationships ............................................................ 3-9

4 Entering Address Book Records


4.1 Understanding Address Book Information ............................................................................ 4-1
4.1.1 Mobile Enterprise Applications for Address Book Information (Release 9.1 Update) .....
4-2
4.2 Entering Address Book Records ............................................................................................... 4-2
4.2.1 Understanding Address Book Records ............................................................................ 4-3

iv
4.2.1.1 Duplicate Entry Validation ......................................................................................... 4-3
4.2.1.2 Global Location Number ............................................................................................. 4-4
4.2.2 Forms Used to Enter Address Book Records................................................................... 4-5
4.2.3 Setting Processing Options for Address Book MBF (P0100041) ................................... 4-5
4.2.3.1 Outbound....................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.2.3.2 Defaults .......................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.2.3.3 Edits ................................................................................................................................ 4-6
4.2.4 Setting Processing Options for Address Book Revisions (P01012)............................... 4-7
4.2.4.1 Entry ............................................................................................................................... 4-7
4.2.4.2 Defaults .......................................................................................................................... 4-7
4.2.4.3 Versions.......................................................................................................................... 4-8
4.2.4.4 Process............................................................................................................................ 4-8
4.2.5 Adding Address Book Records ......................................................................................... 4-9
4.2.5.1 Address Book ................................................................................................................ 4-9
4.2.5.2 Mailing ........................................................................................................................ 4-11
4.2.5.3 Additional 1................................................................................................................ 4-12
4.2.5.4 Additional 2................................................................................................................ 4-14
4.2.5.5 Related Address......................................................................................................... 4-14
4.2.5.6 Category Code 1-10 and Cat Code 11-30 ............................................................... 4-15
4.2.6 Adding Phone Numbers to an Address Book Record ................................................ 4-16
4.2.7 Adding a GLN to an Address Book Record ................................................................. 4-16
4.3 Adding Who's Who Information to Address Book Records ............................................. 4-16
4.3.1 Understanding Who's Who Information....................................................................... 4-17
4.3.1.1 Phone Numbers for Who's Who Records .............................................................. 4-17
4.3.1.2 Electronic Addresses for Who's Who Records ...................................................... 4-17
4.3.1.3 Related Person Information for Who's Who Records .......................................... 4-17
4.3.1.4 Alternate Address Information for Who's Who Records .................................... 4-17
4.3.2 Forms Used to Add Who's Who Information to Address Book Records ................. 4-18
4.3.3 Setting Processing Options for Who's Who MBF PO (P0100087) .............................. 4-19
4.3.3.1 Interoperability .......................................................................................................... 4-19
4.3.4 Adding a Who's Who Record ......................................................................................... 4-19
4.3.4.1 Details.......................................................................................................................... 4-19
4.3.4.2 Additional................................................................................................................... 4-20
4.3.4.3 Category Codes.......................................................................................................... 4-21
4.3.5 Adding Phone Numbers to Who's Who Records ........................................................ 4-21
4.3.6 Adding Electronic Address Information to Who's Who Records ............................. 4-22
4.3.7 Adding Related Person Information to Who's Who Records .................................... 4-22
4.3.7.1 Personal....................................................................................................................... 4-22
4.3.7.2 Cat Codes.................................................................................................................... 4-23
4.3.8 Adding Alternate Address Information to Who's Who Records .............................. 4-23
4.4 Printing the Check for Duplicates Report ............................................................................ 4-23
4.4.1 Understanding the Check for Duplicates Report......................................................... 4-23
4.4.2 Running the Check for Duplicates Report .................................................................... 4-24
4.4.3 Setting Data Sequence for the Check for Duplicates Report ...................................... 4-24
4.4.4 Setting Processing Options for Address Book - Check for Duplicates (R014052) ... 4-24
4.4.4.1 Process......................................................................................................................... 4-24
4.5 Building the Address Book Word Search Table .................................................................. 4-24

v
4.5.1 Understanding Word Search .......................................................................................... 4-24
4.5.2 Form Used for Word Search............................................................................................ 4-25
4.5.3 Running the Word Search Build Program .................................................................... 4-25
4.5.4 Setting Processing Options for Word Search Build (R01BDWRD) ........................... 4-25
4.5.4.1 Process......................................................................................................................... 4-25
4.5.5 Using Address Book Word Search ................................................................................. 4-25

5 Using Foundation Calendar


5.1 Understanding Foundation Calendar...................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 Integrating with Other Systems......................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Understanding the Setup Requirements for Foundation Calendar .................................... 5-2
5.3 Managing Calendars .................................................................................................................. 5-5
5.3.1 Understanding Calendars .................................................................................................. 5-6
5.3.1.1 Associating Calendars ................................................................................................. 5-6
5.3.2 Forms Used to Manage Calendars .................................................................................... 5-7
5.3.3 Setting Processing Options for Calendar Maintenance (P01311) ................................. 5-7
5.3.3.1 Defaults .......................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.3.3.2 Process............................................................................................................................ 5-7
5.3.3.3 Version ........................................................................................................................... 5-8
5.3.4 Adding Calendars................................................................................................................ 5-8
5.3.5 Associating Calendars......................................................................................................... 5-9
5.4 Managing Activities................................................................................................................. 5-10
5.4.1 Understanding Activities................................................................................................. 5-10
5.4.1.1 Assignees .................................................................................................................... 5-10
5.4.1.2 Associations................................................................................................................ 5-11
5.4.1.3 Recurring Activities................................................................................................... 5-11
5.4.1.4 Reminders................................................................................................................... 5-16
5.4.1.5 Activity Homepage ................................................................................................... 5-16
5.4.1.6 Basic and Advanced Activity Search ...................................................................... 5-18
5.4.2 Forms Used to Manage Activities .................................................................................. 5-19
5.4.3 Setting Processing Options for Activity View (P01301) .............................................. 5-19
5.4.3.1 Display ........................................................................................................................ 5-19
5.4.3.2 Default......................................................................................................................... 5-20
5.4.3.3 Process......................................................................................................................... 5-20
5.4.4 Setting Processing Options for Search Activities (P01300) ......................................... 5-20
5.4.4.1 Basic Defaults ............................................................................................................. 5-21
5.4.4.2 Advanced Defaults.................................................................................................... 5-21
5.4.4.3 Process......................................................................................................................... 5-21
5.4.4.4 Versions....................................................................................................................... 5-22
5.4.5 Setting Processing Options for Activity Common Processing Options (P01350) ... 5-22
5.4.5.1 Versions....................................................................................................................... 5-22
5.4.6 Setting Processing Options for Manage Basic Activities (P01302) ............................ 5-22
5.4.6.1 Display ........................................................................................................................ 5-23
5.4.6.2 Default......................................................................................................................... 5-23
5.4.7 Setting Processing Options for Activity Homepage (P01312).................................... 5-23
5.4.7.1 Versions....................................................................................................................... 5-23
5.4.7.2 Defaults ....................................................................................................................... 5-23

vi
5.4.7.3 Process......................................................................................................................... 5-24
5.4.8 Creating an Activity ......................................................................................................... 5-24
5.4.8.1 Details.......................................................................................................................... 5-24
5.4.8.2 Attachments ............................................................................................................... 5-26
5.4.8.3 Settings ........................................................................................................................ 5-26
5.4.8.4 Category Codes.......................................................................................................... 5-26
5.4.8.5 Recurrence and Assignee Information ................................................................... 5-26
5.4.9 Entering Recurrence Information for an Activity ........................................................ 5-26
5.4.9.1 Recurrence .................................................................................................................. 5-27
5.4.10 Managing Assignees for an Activity.............................................................................. 5-27
5.4.11 Adding Tasks Using Quick Add .................................................................................... 5-27
5.4.12 Searching for Activities .................................................................................................... 5-27
5.4.12.1 Basic ............................................................................................................................. 5-27
5.4.12.2 Advanced.................................................................................................................... 5-28
5.4.13 Viewing Activities for Another User ............................................................................. 5-30
5.4.14 Updating the Status of an Activity................................................................................. 5-30
5.5 Creating Action Plans.............................................................................................................. 5-30
5.5.1 Understanding Action Plans ........................................................................................... 5-30
5.5.2 Forms Used to Create Action Plans ............................................................................... 5-31
5.5.3 Setting Up Action Plans ................................................................................................... 5-31
5.5.4 Adding Activities to Action Plans.................................................................................. 5-31

6 Using Address Book Self Service


6.1 Understanding Address Book Self Service ............................................................................. 6-1
6.2 Using Self Service in the Address Book Revisions Program ................................................ 6-1
6.2.1 Understanding Self Service for the Address Book Revisions Program ....................... 6-1
6.2.2 Activating Self Service for the Address Book Revisions Program ............................... 6-2
6.3 Using the Address Book Self Service Program....................................................................... 6-2
6.3.1 Understanding the Address Book Self Service Program ............................................... 6-2
6.3.2 Understanding the Contacts Self Service Program......................................................... 6-3
6.3.3 Forms Used to Update Address Book and Contact Information ................................. 6-3
6.3.4 Setting Processing Options for Address Book Self Service (P01012SS) ....................... 6-3
6.3.4.1 Types .............................................................................................................................. 6-4
6.3.4.2 Entry ............................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.3.4.3 Versions.......................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.3.5 Using the Address Book Self Service Program................................................................ 6-4
6.3.6 Using the Contacts Self Service Program ......................................................................... 6-4

7 Updating and Purging Address Book Records


7.1 Understanding Address Book Update and Purge Programs ............................................... 7-1
7.2 Updating Address Book Records with Effective Dates......................................................... 7-1
7.2.1 Understanding Address Book Updates............................................................................ 7-1
7.2.2 Prerequisite ........................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.3 Running the Effective Address Update Program ........................................................... 7-2
7.3 Updating Category Codes ......................................................................................................... 7-2
7.3.1 Understanding Category Code Updates.......................................................................... 7-2

vii
7.3.2 Prerequisite ........................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.3.3 Running the Global Category Code Update Program ................................................... 7-2
7.3.4 Setting Processing Options for Global Category Code Update (R01490).................... 7-2
7.3.4.1 Criteria............................................................................................................................ 7-3
7.3.4.2 Address Fields............................................................................................................... 7-3
7.3.4.3 Cat Code 115................................................................................................................ 7-3
7.4 Purging Address Book and Message Log Records ................................................................ 7-4
7.4.1 Understanding Address Book and Message Log Purges .............................................. 7-4
7.4.2 Prerequisite ........................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.4.3 Running the Purge Address Book Records Program ..................................................... 7-5
7.4.4 Setting Processing Options for Purge Address Book Records (R01800P) ................... 7-5
7.4.4.1 Defaults .......................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.4.5 Running the Purge Message Log Program ...................................................................... 7-5
7.4.6 Setting Processing Options for Purge Message Log (R01131P) .................................... 7-5
7.4.6.1 Processing ...................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.5 (BRA) Purging Brazilian Address Book Records .................................................................. 7-6
7.5.1 Understanding the Purge Brazilian Address Book Tag Files Program ....................... 7-6
7.5.2 Running the Purge Brazilian Address Book Tag Files Program................................... 7-6
7.5.3 Setting Processing Options for Purge Brazilian Address Book Tag Files (R76011P). 7-6
7.5.3.1 Defaults .......................................................................................................................... 7-6

8 Processing Batch Address Book Records


8.1 Understanding Batch Processing.............................................................................................. 8-1
8.2 Adding Batch Address Book Records...................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.1 Understanding Batch Records ........................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.2 Forms Used to Add Batch Address Book Records ......................................................... 8-3
8.2.3 Creating a New Batch and Adding Records.................................................................... 8-4
8.3 Uploading Address Book Batch Information ......................................................................... 8-4
8.3.1 Understanding the Address Book Batch Upload Process.............................................. 8-4
8.3.2 Prerequisites ......................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.3.3 Running the Address Book Batch Upload Program....................................................... 8-5
8.3.4 Setting Processing Options for Address Book Batch Upload (R01010Z)..................... 8-5
8.3.4.1 Versions.......................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.3.4.2 Process............................................................................................................................ 8-6
8.4 Uploading Customer Master Batch Information.................................................................... 8-6
8.4.1 Understanding the Customer Master Batch Upload Program ..................................... 8-6
8.4.2 Prerequisites ......................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.4.3 Running the Customer Master Batch Upload Program................................................. 8-7
8.4.4 Setting Processing Options for Customer Master Batch Upload (R03010Z)............... 8-7
8.4.4.1 Versions.......................................................................................................................... 8-7
8.4.4.2 Process............................................................................................................................ 8-7
8.5 Uploading Supplier Master Batch Information ...................................................................... 8-7
8.5.1 Understanding the Supplier Master Batch Upload Program........................................ 8-7
8.5.2 Prerequisites ......................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.5.3 Running the Supplier Master Batch Upload Program ................................................... 8-8
8.5.4 Setting Processing Options for Supplier Master Batch Upload (R04010Z) ................. 8-8
8.5.4.1 Versions.......................................................................................................................... 8-8

viii
8.5.4.2 Process............................................................................................................................ 8-8
8.6 Uploading Who's Who Batch Information.............................................................................. 8-8
8.6.1 Understanding the Who's Who Batch Upload Program................................................ 8-8
8.6.2 Prerequisites ......................................................................................................................... 8-9
8.6.3 Running the Who's Who Batch Upload Program ........................................................... 8-9
8.6.4 Setting Processing Options for Who's Who Batch Upload (R011110Z) .................... 8-10
8.6.4.1 Options........................................................................................................................ 8-10
8.7 Revising Unprocessed Batches............................................................................................... 8-10
8.7.1 Understanding Batches That Did Not Process Successfully ...................................... 8-10
8.7.2 Forms Used to Revise Unprocessed Batches ................................................................ 8-11
8.7.3 Revising Unprocessed Batch Records............................................................................ 8-11
8.8 Revising Processed Batches .................................................................................................... 8-11
8.8.1 Understanding Successfully Processed Batches........................................................... 8-11
8.8.2 Forms Used to Revise Processed Batches...................................................................... 8-12
8.9 Purging Address Book Batches.............................................................................................. 8-12
8.9.1 Understanding the Address Book Batch Purge Program ........................................... 8-13
8.9.2 Prerequisite ........................................................................................................................ 8-13
8.9.3 Running the Address Book Batch Purge Program ...................................................... 8-13
8.9.4 Setting Processing Options for Address Book Batch Purge (R0101Z1P).................. 8-13
8.9.4.1 Select ............................................................................................................................ 8-14

A Mapping Fields for Batch Processing


A.1 Mapping Fields in the Address Book - Interoperability Table (F0101Z2) ......................... A-1
A.1.1 Required Fields ................................................................................................................... A-1
A.1.2 Optional Fields .................................................................................................................... A-6
A.1.3 Ignored Fields.................................................................................................................... A-21
A.1.4 User-Reserved Fields........................................................................................................ A-21
A.2 Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1) .......................... A-22
A.2.1 Required Fields ................................................................................................................. A-22
A.2.2 Optional Fields Used by the Accounts Receivable System ........................................ A-25
A.2.3 Optional Fields Used by the Sales Order Management System ................................ A-45
A.2.4 Ignored Fields.................................................................................................................... A-73
A.2.5 Additional Fields for CRM .............................................................................................. A-74
A.2.6 User- Reserved Fields....................................................................................................... A-75
A.3 Mapping Fields in the Supplier Master - Batch Table (F0401Z1)...................................... A-76
A.3.1 Required Fields ................................................................................................................. A-76
A.3.2 Optional Fields Used by the Accounts Payable System.............................................. A-79
A.3.3 Optional Fields Used by the Procurement System ...................................................... A-90
A.3.4 Ignored Fields.................................................................................................................... A-98
A.3.5 User-Reserved Fields........................................................................................................ A-99
A.4 Mapping Fields in the Batch Who's Who Information Table (F0111Z1)........................ A-100
A.4.1 Required Fields ............................................................................................................... A-100
A.4.2 Optional Fields ................................................................................................................ A-104
A.4.3 Ignored Fields.................................................................................................................. A-108
A.4.4 User-Reserved Fields...................................................................................................... A-109
A.5 Mapping Fields in the Batch - Related Person Table (F01112Z1) ................................... A-110
A.5.1 Required Fields ............................................................................................................... A-110

ix
A.5.2 Optional Fields ................................................................................................................ A-114
A.5.3 Ignored Fields.................................................................................................................. A-116
A.6 Mapping Fields in the Phones - Interoperability Table (F0115Z1) ................................. A-116
A.6.1 Required Fields ............................................................................................................... A-116
A.6.2 Optional Fields ................................................................................................................ A-120
A.6.3 Ignored Fields.................................................................................................................. A-121
A.7 Mapping Fields in the Batch - Electronic Address Table (F01151Z1)............................. A-122
A.7.1 Required Fields ............................................................................................................... A-122
A.7.2 Optional Fields ................................................................................................................ A-125
A.7.3 Ignored Fields.................................................................................................................. A-127
A.8 Mapping Fields in the Batch - Alternative Address Table (F01161Z1) ......................... A-127
A.8.1 Required Fields ............................................................................................................... A-127
A.8.2 Optional Fields ................................................................................................................ A-131
A.8.3 Ignored Fields.................................................................................................................. A-134

B Tables Used by the Address Book System


B.1 Address Book Tables ................................................................................................................. B-1
B.2 Address Book Tables for Batch Processing ............................................................................ B-3

C Delivered Workflow for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book


C.1 Delivered Workflow for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book ................................. C-1
C.1.1 Activity / Task Reminder.................................................................................................. C-1
C.1.1.1 Description ................................................................................................................... C-1
C.1.1.2 Workflow Objects ........................................................................................................ C-1

D JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book Reports


D.1 Address Book Reports............................................................................................................... D-1
D.2 Address Book Reports: A to Z.................................................................................................. D-1
D.3 Selected Address Book Reports ............................................................................................... D-2
D.3.1 R01050-Copy Category Codes to Customer Master ...................................................... D-2
D.3.2 Processing Options for Copy Category Codes to Customer Master........................... D-2
D.3.2.1 Cat Code 0115............................................................................................................. D-2
D.3.2.2 Cat Code 1630............................................................................................................. D-2
D.3.3 R01401 - Print Mailing Labels ........................................................................................... D-2
D.3.4 Processing Options for Print Mailing Labels (R01401).................................................. D-2
D.3.4.1 Print ............................................................................................................................... D-2
D.3.5 R01401A - Standard Mailing Labels................................................................................. D-3
D.3.6 Processing Options for Standard Address Labels (R01401A) ...................................... D-3
D.3.6.1 Display .......................................................................................................................... D-3

x
Preface

Welcome to the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book


Implementation Guide.

Audience
This guide is intended for implementers and end users of the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Address Book system.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Products


This implementation guide refers to these JD Edwards EnterpriseOne products from
Oracle:
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Accounts Payable
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Accounts Receivable
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Sales Force Automation

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Application Fundamentals


Additional, essential information describing the setup and design of your system
appears in a companion volume of documentation called JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Financial Management Application Fundamentals 9.2 Implementation Guide.
Customers must conform to the supported platforms for the release as detailed in the
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne minimum technical requirements. In addition, JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne may integrate, interface, or work in conjunction with other Oracle
products. Refer to the cross-reference material in the Program Documentation at
http://oracle.com/contracts/index.html for Program prerequisites and version
cross-reference documents to assure compatibility of various Oracle products.

See Also:
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Financial Management
Fundamentals Implemenation Guide.

Documentation Accessibility
For information about Oracle's commitment to accessibility, visit the Oracle
Accessibility Program website at
http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=docacc.

xi
Access to Oracle Support
Oracle customers that have purchased support have access to electronic support
through My Oracle Support. For information, visit
http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=info or visit
http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=trs if you are hearing
impaired.

Related Information
For additional information about JD Edwards EnterpriseOne applications, features,
content, and training, visit the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne pages on the JD Edwards
Resource Library located at:
http://learnjde.com

Conventions
The following text conventions are used in this document:

Convention Meaning
boldface Boldface type indicates graphical user interface elements
associated with an action, or terms defined in text or the glossary.
Italics Italic type indicates book titles, emphasis, or placeholder
variables for which you supply particular values.
Monospace Monospace type indicates commands within a paragraph. URLs,
code in examples, text that appears on the screen, or text that you
enter.

xii
1
Introduction to JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
1

Address Book

This chapter contains the following topics:


Section 1.1, "Understanding JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book"
Section 1.2, "Integrating JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book With the JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne Systems"
Section 1.3, "Implementing the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book"
Section 1.4, "Business Interface Integration Objects"

1.1 Understanding JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book


The Address Book system is the foundation for other JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
systems. The Address Book system contains name, address, and phone numbers for
customers, suppliers, companies, and so on. This information is stored in several
database tables to create a central repository of information. Other JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne systems retrieve up-to-date name and address information from the
Address Book system. For example, the Accounts Payable system uses address book
information for supplier payments and the Accounts Receivable system uses address
book information to generate customer invoices and statements.
With a central repository of information that integrates with other JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne systems, you can effectively manage your address book information.
The Address Book system includes:
Maintenance of complete information for employees, customers, suppliers, and so
on.
Notification of authorized users about special situations, such as credit warnings,
hold messages, and other critical account information.
Classification of entries by search type for inquiry and reporting purposes.
Ability to retrieve information by name, address, phone number, and search type.
Management of tax information.
Ability to associate multiple addresses with a single address book record.
Effective dates for address changes.
Supplemental data for organizing and tracking information that is not included in
standard master table.

Introduction to JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book 1-1


Integrating JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book With the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Systems

1.1.1 Address Book Reporting


For reporting, the Address Book system enables you to define how you sort and
classify information. You can customize reports to meet your needs by creating and
organizing user-defined information and then attaching that information to address
book records. With user-defined information, you can define:
Up to 30 address book category codes for tracking and reporting information
about addresses. For example, you can sort suppliers by salesperson for one report
and by region for another report.
Up to 10 who's who category codes to identify individuals, such as billing
contacts, executives, and sales contacts, who are associated with specific company
address book records.
Up to 10 contact information category codes that you can use to further categorize
who's who entries.
Up to five related person category codes to group entries for related persons.
You can also customize reports to produce mailing lists, labels, and so on

1.2 Integrating JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book With the JD


Edwards EnterpriseOne Systems

The following JD Edwards EnterpriseOne systems from Oracle integrate with the JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book system and allow you to do the tasks
described:

System Task
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Accounts Payable Set up suppliers and tax entities.
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Accounts Set up customers and tax entities.
Receivable
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne General Set up companies and business units.
Accounting
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Job Cost Set up jobs and assign them to a project
manager and superintendent in addition to
suppliers and subcontractors.
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Fixed Assets Set up employees who are responsible for
assets and suppliers who provide assets.
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Purchase Order Set up suppliers, buyers, carriers,
Management branch/plants, ship-to addresses, and landed
cost suppliers (duty brokers).
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Sales Order Set up ship-to addresses, sold-to addresses,
Management carriers, salespersons, branch/plants, and
customer billing instructions.
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Inventory Set up planners, buyers, and branch/plants in
Management the item master record.
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Contract Set up suppliers for progress payments and
Management set up contract logs.
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Contract Billing Set up architects, customers, owners, and
remit-to, alternate bill-to, and send-to
addresses.

1-2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Implementing the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book

System Task
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Service Billing Set up employees and customers (for work
orders).
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Advanced Pricing Set up category codes to categorize customers
for special pricing.
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Requirements Set up branch/plants and planners, such as
Planning material planners or employees in charge of a
product or line.
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Forecasting Set up hierarchies for forecasting.
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Equipment/Plant Set up employees who are responsible for
Management equipment, suppliers who provide equipment,
and employees who are assigned to perform
preventive maintenance.
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Work Order Set up customers, managers, originators, and
Management supervisors.
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Service Set up customers and service providers.
Management
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Payroll Set up employees and the name and address
of W2 reporting entities.
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Human Capital Set up participants, beneficiaries, and
Management applicants.
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne System user Set up Address Book records for user names
profiles and attach E-mail addresses for each user
name.
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Workflow Tools Set up destination of workflow messages and
E-mail addresses for address book records.

1.3 Implementing the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book


This section provides an overview of the steps that are required to implement the JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book system.
In the planning phase of your implementation, take advantage of all JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne sources of information, including the installation guides and
troubleshooting information.
When determining which electronic software updates (ESUs) to install for JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Address Book, use the EnterpriseOne and World Change Assistant.
EnterpriseOne and World Change Assistant, a Java-based tool, reduces the time that is
required to search for and download ESUs by 75 percent or more and enables you to
install multiple ESUs at one time.
See JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Software Updates Guide.

1.3.1 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book Implementation Steps


The following are the suggested application-specific implementation steps for JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book:
1. Set up user-defined codes, category codes, constants, next numbers, postal codes,
self-service, supplemental data, and the audit log.
See Setting Up the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book System.
2. Set up user-defined codes for Foundation Calendar

Introduction to JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book 1-3


Business Interface Integration Objects

See Using Foundation Calendar.


3. Set up parent/child relationships and organizational structures.
See Setting Up Parent/Child Relationships and Organizational Structures.

1.4 Business Interface Integration Objects


A business interface is a set of components that implementation teams can use to
create an integration between JD Edwards EnterpriseOne and an external system.
Business interfaces can include one or more of these business interface components:
Business Services
Real-Time Events
Batch Import and Export Programs
For additional information about business interfaces, and the business objects
available for this product area, see these topics in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Applications Business Interface Reference Guide:
Address Book

1-4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


2
Setting Up the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
2

Address Book System

This chapter contains the following topics:


Section 2.1, "Understanding JD Edwards Address Book Setup Requirements"
Section 2.2, "Setting Up User-Defined Codes"
Section 2.3, "Setting Up Category Codes"
Section 2.4, "Setting Up Constants"
Section 2.5, "Setting Up an Audit Log"
Section 2.6, "Setting Up Next Numbers"
Section 2.7, "Setting Up Postal Codes"
Section 2.8, "Setting Up Supplemental Data"

2.1 Understanding JD Edwards Address Book Setup Requirements


Before you use the JD Edwards Address Book system, you must set up certain
information that the system uses during processing. This information customizes the
system for your business needs. If you change a setup feature after you begin using the
JD Edwards Address Book system, ensure that the change does not adversely affect
existing records. Constants are one of the setup features. When you set up constants,
the information applies to all address book records; therefore, if you change your
constants, ensure that your existing address book records are not adversely affected.
The following table describes the setup features for the JD Edwards Address Book
system:

Feature Setup Task


User-Defined Codes Use to categorize data and standardize your
data entry.
Category Codes Use to track and report on information that is
unique to your business.

Setting Up the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book System 2-1


Setting Up User-Defined Codes

Feature Setup Task


Constants Use to establish system basics, such as:
The symbols used to distinguish the
different address book number formats.
Whether to restrict users from viewing
the electronic mail of other users.
Whether an address book record can have
date-effective addresses.
Whether to activate Address Book data
security.
Country Constants Use to determine the format for a mailing
label.
Address Book Audit Log Use to record additions and changes to
address book records.
Next Numbers Use to assign numbers to address book
records, based on an automatic numbering
system, and to specify whether to assign check
digits for a type of next number.
Postal Code Validation Use to verify the accuracy of postal codes on
address book records.

2.2 Setting Up User-Defined Codes


Many programs in the JD Edwards Address Book system and other JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne systems use user-defined codes (UDCs) to process information. Most of
the UDCs for the JD Edwards Address Book system are shipped with predefined data.
You can change or delete the predefined data if it is not hard-coded and add your own
UDCs to suit your needs. You should not change the product code, code type, or
description name for the UDCs in the JD Edwards Address Book system.
The following table describes the UDCs that are used by the JD Edwards Address
Book system:

User-Defined Code Description


Search Type Codes (01/ST) Search type codes classify address book
records and limit the number of records that
the system locates when you search for
address book records. Examples include:
A: Applicant
C: Customer
E: Employee
Standard Industrial Classification (01/SC) Standard industrial classification (SIC) codes
can be added to your address book records.
The SIC system is a series of number codes
that classify businesses by the types of
products or services that they provide.
Businesses engaged in the same activity are
assigned the same SIC code. The U.S.
Department of Commerce and U.S. businesses
developed the SIC system. Examples include:
0700: Agricultural Services
1000: Metal Mining

2-2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Setting Up User-Defined Codes

User-Defined Code Description


Credit Messages (00/CM) Credit messages notify you of a credit status
for a particular address book record. Examples
include:
B: Bad credit risk
1: Over credit limit
2: Requires purchase order
State and Province Codes (00/S) State and province codes represent states or
provinces and can be up to three characters.
Examples include:
BC: British Columbia
CO: Colorado
DC: District of Columbia
IL: Illinois
Word Search Special Characters (H95/SC) You can direct the Word Search feature to
bypass special characters by adding them to
UDC table H95/SC. Any special character in
this table is bypassed whenever you use the
Word Search feature to locate address book
records. The Word Search feature does not
enable you to bypass entire words.
To locate records that contain a special
character in UDC table H95/SC, first remove
the special character from the UDC. Then
locate each record using a method other than
the Word Search feature, open the record, and
save it without making any changes so that
the special character is part of the Address
Book Master table (F0101). Then you can use
the Word Search feature to locate the address
book records using the special character as
part of your search.
Country Codes (00/CN) Country codes can be up to three characters.
Examples include:
AU: Australia
BE: Belgium
CN: China
Salutation Codes (01/SL) Salutation codes represent titles of
individuals. You can use salutations on
reports, mailing labels, and so on. Examples
include:
A: Mr.
B: Mrs.
C: Ms.
D: Dr.
Electronic Mail Message Type Codes (01/MT) Message type codes are used to send speed
messages to other users. Examples include:
1: Asked that you call back.
2: Will call again.
3: Returned your call.

Setting Up the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book System 2-3


Setting Up User-Defined Codes

User-Defined Code Description


Language Preference Codes (01/LP) Language preference codes specify the
language for documents such as invoices and
statements and reports. Before any
translations become effective, a language code
must exist at either the system level or in your
user preferences.
The language preference codes work in
conjunction with vocabulary overrides to
select the correct language translation.
Examples include:
DU: Dutch
E: English
F: French
Dun & Bradstreet Rating Codes (01/DB) Credit rating codes are provided by Dun &
Bradstreet. Examples include:
BA1: High
BA2: Good
BA3: Fair
Experian Credit Rating Codes (01/TR) Credit rating codes are provided by Experian.
Examples include:
AAA: Excellent
BBB: Good
CCC: Fair
Type Codes (01/W0) Type codes identify a who's who entry for an
address book record. Examples include:
A: Attention name
B: Billing
C: Contact name
Contact Type Codes (01/CT) Contact type codes categorize contact names,
which are associated with a who's who entry,
by role or function. Examples include:
C: Competitor
D: Decision maker
I: Influencer
Relation Type Codes (01/RT) Relation type codes indicate the relationship
between the who's who entry and the name in
the Related Person table (F01112). Relation
type codes also can indicate the role or
function of an individual.
Electronic Address Type Codes (01/ET) Electronic address type codes indicate
whether an electronic address is a personal
address, such as an E-mail address, or an
internet address, such as a uniform resource
locator (URL).

See Also:
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Foundation Guide.

2-4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Setting Up Category Codes

2.3 Setting Up Category Codes


Category codes are a type of UDC that you customize to manage the tracking and
reporting requirements of your business. You use category codes to organize address
book information and standardize data entry.
The JD Edwards Address Book system is shipped with predefined category codes, but
you can change and delete the predefined data if it is not hard-coded and add your
own category codes. You use the User Defined Codes form to set up your category
codes.
You can change the category code description, but you should not change the product
code and type code. For example, you can change the description of UDC table 01/23
from A/B Selection Code 23 to Supplier Products. You can also change the
characteristics for your category codes. For example, you can change the size (up to 10
characters) and type (numeric or alphanumeric). If you change the category code
description or any of the characteristics for a category code, your system administrator
must change the data dictionary edit rule and how the data dictionary is mapped so
that the changes appear on your data entry forms.
You use the Address Book Revision program (P01012) to assign category codes to
address book records. If you assign a category code to your address book records and
then decide to change the description or a characteristic of the category code, you must
manually change the existing address book records.
If you use address book category codes (01/01-30) and then later decide to change the
values in the user-defined tables, use the User Defined Codes form to change the
values and then run the Global Category Code Update program (R01490) to update all
of your existing address book records.

Note: When you set up address book category codes, you should
create a blank record on the User Defined Codes form. This provides a
default if you do not need to assign a category code to an address
book record.

Setting Up the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book System 2-5


Setting Up Category Codes

Category Code Description


Address Book Category Codes (01/01-0) You can define up to 30 address book category
codes in UDC table 01/01-30 to organize your
address book information.
You might set up an address book category
code so that you can track or report on specific
information about a group of address book
records. For example, if some of your records
are for suppliers, the Address Book system
already provides search type V for you to use
when you enter or revise an address book
record for a supplier. You might want to
further categorize your suppliers by the types
of products that they supply. For example, you
decide to set up address book category code
23 to store supplier product information. Use
the User Defined Codes form to set up
category codes for HDW (hardware), SFT
(software), ELC (electrical), and so on. Then,
when you assign a category code to an
address book record, you can assign
HDW,SFT, or ELC for category code 23.
Category code 07 is reserved for 1099
reporting in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Accounts Payable system. If you do not have
1099 reporting, you can use category code 07
for another purpose.
Who's Who Category Codes (01/W0-WT) You can define up to 10 category codes for
who's who in UDC table 01/WO-WT.
Who's who is a list of individuals that you
associate with an address book record. For
example, when you enter an address book
record for a customer company, you might
want to identify individuals who work for the
company. These individuals are not assigned
an address book number, but they are
associated with their company address book
number through the who's who list. When
you set up a who's who category code, you
can assign the category code to all who's who
entries, if applicable.
Contact Information Category Codes You can define up to 10 category codes for
(01/N1-NA) contact information in UDC table 01/N1-NA.
Contact information is additional information
that you can assign to a who's who entry.
When you set up a category code for contact
information, you can assign the category code
to all contact entries, if applicable.
Related Person Category Codes (01/P1-P5) You can define up to five category codes for
related person information in UDC table
01/P1-P5.
Related persons are individuals who are
associated with an individual on a who's who
list. For example, a related person might be
the spouse of a who's who entry. When you
set up a category code for a related person,
you can assign the category code to all related
person entries, if applicable.

2-6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Setting Up Constants

2.4 Setting Up Constants


This section provides overviews of address book constants and country constants and
discusses how to:
Set up address book constants.
Set up country constants.

2.4.1 Understanding Address Book Constants


When you set up constants for the JD Edwards Address Book system, you specify
these constants in the Address Book Constants program (P0000):
The symbol that identifies which format to use when locating address book
numbers.
Whether to enable different mailing addresses for the same address book record
based on effective dates.
Whether security is activated for the electronic mail that passes through the
system.
Whether to activate personal data security.
Constants are cached information. If you change settings for any of the constants,
contact your system administrator to determine what additional steps you must
perform for the changes to take effect.

Important: When you change a constant, you change all address


book records that use that constant. Only authorized personnel should
be allowed to change address book constants.

2.4.1.1 Symbol to Identify Address Book Records


You use a symbol to specify default and alternate identifiers for locating address book
records in other JD Edwards EnterpriseOne systems such as JD Edwards Accounts
Receivable and JD Edwards Accounts Payable. If you have converted data from
another system, you can locate the address book record for a company or individual
by entering the alternate identifier.
To set up constants to define the alternate identifiers, enter a unique symbol (for
example, * or /) in these fields on the Address Book Constants form:
Symbol to Identify A/B Short Number.
Symbol to Identify A/B Long ID
Symbol to Identify A/B Tax ID.
To specify one of these identifier fields as the default, leave the field blank. You can
have only one default identifier.
For example, you want to use the number assigned by the Address Book system as the
default identifier to locate address book records. On the Address Book Constants form,
leave the Symbol to Identify A/B Short Number field blank. When you access any of
the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne systems, you can locate the address book record by
entering the eight-digit number that is assigned by the JD Edwards Address Book
system.
You might also want to locate an address book record by entering a name or number
other than the number that is assigned by the JD Edwards Address Book system. On

Setting Up the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book System 2-7


Setting Up Constants

the Address Book Constants form, enter a unique symbol, such as *, in the Symbol to
Identify A/B Long ID field. When you use the Address Book Revisions program to
enter or update an address book record, you can enter the address book long ID (for
example, UNIVERSAL) in the Long Address Number field. When you use another JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne system, you can enter the long address book ID with its
identifying symbol (for example, *UNIVERSAL) and the record appears with the
eight-digit number.

2.4.1.2 Address by Effective Date


You use the Address Book Constants program to specify whether your address book
records can have more than one address. Allowing your address book records to have
more than one address is helpful if a person or company moves to another address on
a certain date. You can send correspondence, invoices, payments, and other pertinent
information to the most current address while maintaining previous address
information. If you activate the Address by Effective Date constant, the effective date
appears when you use the Address Book Revisions program to enter or revise address
book records. The addresses are stored in the Address by Date table (F0116). If you
activate this constant, all address book records can have multiple addresses. If you do
not activate this constant, address book records can have only one address.
If you activate the Address by Effective Date constant, you must run the Effective
Address Update program (R01840) periodically to ensure that the system is using the
current date for all address book records. Address book records are not updated with
new addresses unless you run the Effective Address Update program.

2.4.1.3 Electronic Mail Security


You use the Address Book Constants program to restrict users from viewing the
electronic mail of other users. To set up electronic mail security, activate the Activate
E-Mail Security constant.

2.4.1.4 Personal Data Security


You use the Address Book Constants program to restrict users from viewing personal
data when reviewing address book records. After you perform the required setup
tasks for Address Book data security, secured users cannot view information in the
fields that you specify as secured when reviewing or updating address book records.
For each secured field, the system populates the entire field with asterisks and disables
the field for any updates.
The Address Book data privacy feature provides an additional level of security by not
displaying the matching address book record when a user enters a valid value in the
query by example (QBE) line for a secured field. For example, if a user enters numbers
into the Phone Number field (and the Phone Number field is secured) in an attempt to
locate a valid employee, the system does not display the matching records, even if the
user happens to enter a valid number. This feature prevents users from being able to
locate valid employee information.
In addition to storing Address Book privacy data in the Address book Data Permission
List Definition table (F01138), the system stores privacy data in these tables:
Address Book - Whos Who (F0111)
Address Book - Phone Numbers (F0115)
Address by Date (F0116)
When Address Book data security is configured, a system administrator can enable an
additional level of security that prevents secured private data from appearing in other

2-8 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Setting Up Constants

applications and output, such as reports, Universal Batch Engine (UBE) results, Data
Browser, and Universal Table Browser (UTB).
To set up the system for Address Book data privacy, you must set up:
The Activate Personal Data Security constant in the Address Book Constants.
Permission list definitions.
Permission list relationships.
See JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Security Administration Guide.

2.4.2 Understanding Country Constants


Country constants define how address book information prints on reports and mailing
labels. Countries require specific information for postal addresses. If you conduct
business in different countries, you must define mail formats for each country. When
you set up country constants, you specify the mailing format for the country and a
default country format.
Country constant information is stored in the Country Constants Master File table
(F0070).

2.4.2.1 Mailing Formats


The Address Book system provides 16 mailing formats. When you use the Address
Book Revisions program to enter or revise an address book record, you assign a
country code to the address book record. When you print a report or label, the system
matches the country code that is assigned to the address book record with the country
code that is stored in the F0070 table and prints the address in the format that is
specified by the address format ID. When you set up country constants, you assign an
address format ID to a country code.

2.4.2.2 Default Country Format


When you set up country constants, you can include any of these items for an address
format ID:
Attention line and location of the attention line.
Salutation and location of the salutation.
Postal code sign.
Country code.
Each country code that you set up can include a different combination of these items,
even if they have the same format number. For example, you assign an address format
ID of 08 to both Brazil and Mexico. You want Brazil address records to include an
attention line. On the Set Up Country Constants form, you set up address format ID 08
to include attention line information such as attention abbreviation, attention name
placement, and title location. When you print reports and labels for Brazilian
addresses, the attention information appears. The attention information does not
appear for any other country using format address ID 08 unless you specify attention
information on the Set Up Country Constants form for that country.
When you set up country constants, set up one constant with a blank country code.
Enter all other information for that country constant, including the address format ID
number.
You can set up only one format for each country.

Setting Up the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book System 2-9


Setting Up Constants

Important: When you change the address format ID for a specific


country, all address book records that are associated with that country
are affected. Only authorized personnel should be allowed to change
country constants.

2.4.2.3 Predefined Mailing Formats


This table lists the mailing formats that are shipped with the JD Edwards Address
Book system, as well as the items included in each format. If you need more than 16
formats or if a format does not satisfy your business requirements, you must
customize your system to accommodate the new formats.
Enter the country, which is optional for these formats, using the Country Constants
Revisions program (P0070).

Mailing Format Items Included


Format 01 Mailing Name
Address Block
Postal Code/City
Country (optional)
Format 02 Mailing Name
Address Block
City
State
Postal Code
Country (optional)
Format 03 Mailing Name
Address Block
City/Postal Code
State
Country (optional)
Format 04 Mailing Name
Address Block
City/State/Postal Code
Country (optional)
Format 05 Mailing Name
Address Block
City
State
Country (optional)
Format 06 Mailing Name
Address Block
Postal Code/State/City
Country (optional)

2-10 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Setting Up Constants

Mailing Format Items Included


Format 07 Mailing Name
Address Block
City
Country (optional)
Format 08 Mailing Name
Address Block
Postal Code/City/State
Country (optional)
Format 09 Mailing Name
Address Block
City/State
Postal Code
Country (optional)
Format 10 Mailing Name
Address Block
City/Postal Code
Country (optional)
Format 11 Mailing Name
Postal Code/City
Address Block
Country (optional)
Format 12 Mailing Name
Address Block
City/State
Postal Code
Country (optional)
Format 13 Postal Code
Mailing Name
Address Block
City
Country (optional)
Format 14 Mailing Name
Address Block
City
County
Postal Code
Country (optional)
Format 15 Postal Code
Address Block
City
Mailing Name
Country (optional)

Setting Up the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book System 2-11


Setting Up Constants

Mailing Format Items Included


Format 16 Mailing Name
Address Block
Postal Code/City
Country (optional)

2.4.3 Prerequisite
Before you complete the tasks in this section, you must define country codes in UDC
table 00/CN. To assign more than one address format ID for a country, define a second
country code.

2.4.4 Forms Used to Set Up Constants

Form Name FormID Navigation Usage


Address Book W0000F Address Book Setup Set up Address Book
Constants (G0141), Address constants.
Book Constants
Click Address Book
Constants on the
System Setup form.
Set up Country W0070B Address Book Setup Specify the mailing
Constants (G0141), Country format for a country
Constants Revisions and a default country
format.
Click Add on the
Work With Country
Constants form.

2.4.5 Setting Up Address Book Constants


Access the Address Book Constants form.

Figure 21 Address Book Constants form

Symbol to Identify A/B Short Number


Enter a symbol, such as blank, *, or /, to precede the short address book number.
You can search for an address book record by entering the short number preceded by
the designated symbol.
The address book short identification number is usually assigned by the Address Book
system when you create a new address book record. If the eight-digit number is the
format that you typically enter to search for an address book record, leave this field
blank.

2-12 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Setting Up Constants

Only one of the format entry fields for numbers can be blank. The other two must each
be uniquely identified with a symbol. Be sure that the symbol you designate (*, /, #,
and so on) is not used for another purpose in the system.

Symbol to Identify Alternate Key


Enter a symbol, such as blank, *, or /, to precede the long address book number.
You can search for an address book record by entering the long identification number
preceded by the designated symbol.
The long identification number might be an address book number that you used in
another system. If this number is the format that you typically enter to search for an
address book record, leave this field blank. Only one of the format entry fields for
numbers can be blank. The other two must each be uniquely identified with a symbol.
Be sure that the symbol you designate (*, /, #, and so on) is not used for another
purpose in the system.

Symbol to Identify A/B Tax ID


Enter a symbol, such as blank, *, or /, to precede a tax identification number such as a
social security number, federal or state tax identification number, sales tax number,
and so on. You can search for an address book record by entering the tax identification
number preceded by the designated symbol.
If you typically enter a tax identification number to search for an address book record,
leave this field blank. Only one of the format entry fields can be blank. The other two
must each be uniquely identified with a symbol. Be sure that the symbol you designate
(*, /, #, and so on) is not used for another purpose in the system.

Address by Effective Date


Select to specify that you are using the multiple addresses by effective date feature for
an address book record. If you select this option, the system can maintain multiple
addresses for each address book record and identify an effective date for each address.

Activate E-Mail Security


Select to prevent users from viewing other users' Work Center messages. If you select
this option, the system displays an option on the row menu, View Mail, on the
Employee Queue Manager form in the Employee Work Center program.

Activate Personal Data Security


Select to enable the Address Book Personal Data Security feature. This feature protects
personal data from being displayed for certain users. This option enables only the
Address Book Personal Data Security feature. To fully use this feature, you must also
set up your permissions in the Address Book Data Permissions application.
See JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Security Administration Guide.

2.4.6 Setting Up Country Constants


Access the Set Up Country Constants form.

Setting Up the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book System 2-13


Setting Up Constants

Figure 22 Set Up Country Constants form

Country
Enter a UDC (00/CN) that identifies a country. The country code has no effect on
currency conversion.
The JD Edwards Address Book system uses the country code for data selection and
address formatting.

Address Format ID
Specifies how an address appears on documents, reports, and mailing labels.

2.4.6.1 Country Code Fields


These fields are associated with the country code. If you enter values in these fields,
the values appear on all address book records that use that particular country code.

Attention Abbreviation
Enter the abbreviation for the word Attention that the system will print on mailing
labels.

Attention Name Placement


Specifies where the attention name line appears in the formatted mailing address.
Values are:
Blank or 0: Insert attention line after Address Line 1.
1: Insert attention line after Address Line 2.
2: Insert attention line after the last nonblank address line.
3: Insert attention line on the first line before the street address.

Title before attention name


Select this option for the title to be placed before the Who's Who attention name.

Standard Salutation
Enter the personal salutation to be used in an address. The value in this field is
associated with the value in the Address Format ID field.

2-14 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Setting Up an Audit Log

If you set up a standard salutation, the salutation appears on every address record that
uses that address format ID.

Standard Salutation Placement


Specifies the placement of the salutation in relation to the name. Values are:
Blank or 0: The standard salutation that prints before the name.
1: The standard salutation that prints after the name.
2: The standard salutation placement is one of these locations:
At the end of the last nonblank address line if no attention name exists.
At the end of the attention name if an attention name exists.

Postal Code Sign


Enter the prefix that precedes the postal code. This prefix is required by some
countries. You can enter up to four alphanumeric characters. When you enter the
prefix, include a separator, such as a blank space or a hyphen, after the prefix. The
system prints the prefix and the separator before the postal code. For example, if you
enter CH- for the prefix and 88023 for the postal code, the system prints CH-88023. If
you leave this field blank, the system prints only the postal code.

Note: This field is required by the Japanese postal system and must
appear on the first line of an address.

Print Country Code


Select this option to print the country code for the mailing address.

2.5 Setting Up an Audit Log


This section provides an overview of the audit log and discusses how to set up an
address book audit log.

2.5.1 Understanding the Audit Log


If you want to keep a record of changes made to existing address book records and a
record of new address book records that have been entered, you can create an address
book audit log. You create the audit log by entering in the processing options for the
Address Book Revisions program (P01012) a version of the Address Book MBF
program (P0100041) that has outbound interoperability enabled. The system stores the
audit log information in the Address Book - Interoperability table (F0101Z2).
You can set up the address book audit log feature to record changes to existing records
only, or to record both new records that have been entered and changes to existing
records.

2.5.2 Form Used to Set Up an Audit Log

Form Name FormID Navigation Usage


Work with Interactive W983051I System Set up an address
Versions Administration Tools book audit log.
menu (GH9011),
Interactive Versions

Setting Up the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book System 2-15


Setting Up Next Numbers

2.5.3 Setting Up an Address Book Audit Log


Access the Work with Interactive Versions form.
To set up an address book audit log:
1. Enter P0100041 in the Interactive Application field, and click Find.
2. On Available Versions, select a version.
3. From the Row menu, select Processing Options.
4. On the Outbound tab:
For the Transaction Type processing option, enter JDEAB.
For the Change Transaction Image processing option, specify one of the
following:
Blank: Write the record after the change
1:Write the record both before and after the change
5. Click OK.
6. On Available Versions, click Close to exit.
7. Access the Daily Processing menu (G01).
8. Locate the processing options for Address Book Revisions.
9. On the Versions tab, enter the name of the Address Book MBF version (from step
2) that you modified and click OK.

2.6 Setting Up Next Numbers


This section discusses how to set up address book next numbers.

2.6.1 Form Used to Set Up Next Numbers

Form Name FormID Navigation Usage


Set Up Next Numbers W0002C Enter NN in the Fast Set up Address Book
by System Path field. next numbers.
Select Address Book,
and click Select on
Work With Next
Numbers.

2.6.2 Setting Up Address Book Next Numbers


Access the Set Up Next Numbers by System form.

Check Digit
Specifies whether the system adds a number to the end of each next number assigned.
For example, if you use check digits and the next number is 2, the system adds a check
digit such as 7, making the last two numbers 27. The check digits option provides a
method for increasing numbers randomly to prevent the assignment of transposed
numbers. In this example, the system would never assign next number 72 while the
check digits option is activated. Select this option to add a check digit.

2-16 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Setting Up Supplemental Data

See Also:
"Setting Up Next Numbers" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Applications Financial Management Fundamentals Implemenation
Guide.

2.7 Setting Up Postal Codes


This section provides an overview of postal codes and discusses how to set up address
book postal codes.

2.7.1 Understanding Postal Codes


You can use the Postal Code Revisions program (P0117) to set up postal codes. The
system stores the postal codes in the Postal Codes (F0017) and Postal Code Address
(F0118) tables. By accessing the data in these tables, you can enter a postal code and
have the system return a city, state, and county to the Address Book Revisions
program. To enter postal codes for address book records, you must first set processing
options for the Address Book Revision program.
To revise a postal code, you must delete the postal code on the Work with Postal Codes
form and then read the code.

2.7.2 Form Used to Set Up Postal Codes

Form Name FormID Navigation Usage


Postal Code Revisions W0117B Address Book Setup Add postal codes to
(G0141), Postal Codes the Address Book
system.
Click Add on Work
With Postal Codes.

2.7.3 Setting Up Address Book Postal Codes


Access the Postal Code Revisions form.

Postal Code
Specifies where a letter is to be routed. Attach this United States ZIP code or postal
code to the address for delivery in other countries. This code is used as the low-end
value when you are doing Postal Code Transaction range processing.

Second Postal Code


Enter the postal code attached to an address for delivery in any country. This code is
used as the high-end value when you are doing Postal Code Transaction range
processing.

2.8 Setting Up Supplemental Data


This section lists prerequisites and discusses how to set up supplemental data for
address book.

2.8.1 Prerequisites
Before you complete the tasks in this section, you must:

Setting Up the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book System 2-17


Setting Up Supplemental Data

For the Address Book system data types to appear on the CIF Supplemental Data
menu (G01312), enter AB in the Supplemental Database Code processing option
for the Supplemental Data program (P00092).
Specify whether you are using effective dates in the processing option for the
Supplemental Data program.

See Also:
"Understanding Supplemental Data" in the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Applications Financial Management Fundamentals
Implemenation Guide.

2.8.2 Forms Used to Set Up Supplemental Data

Form Name FormID Navigation Usage


Work With W00091B CIF Supplemental Review a list of
Supplemental Data (G01312), supplemental
Database Setup Supplemental Data database codes.
Setup
Supplemental W00091A Click Add on the Add a supplemental
Database Setup Work With database code.
Supplemental
Database Setup form.
Work With W00092D CIF Supplemental Work with
Supplemental Data Data (G01312), supplemental
Supplemental Data database codes for
specific address book
records.

2.8.3 Setting Up Supplemental Data for Address Book


Access the Supplemental Database Setup form.
To track and store information that is not included in the standard master tables, you
can set up supplemental data. The JD Edwards Address Book system does not require
that you set up and use supplemental data.

2-18 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


3
Setting Up Parent/Child Relationships and
3

Organizational Structures

This chapter contains the following topics:


Section 3.1, "Setting Up Parent/Child Relationships"
Section 3.2, "Setting Up Tiers for Parent/Child Organizational Structures"
Section 3.3, "Setting Up Enhanced Parent/Child Relationships"

3.1 Setting Up Parent/Child Relationships


This section provides an overview of parent/child relationships and discusses how to:
Set processing options for Structure Revisions.
Set processing options for Structure Inquiry.
Create parent/child relationships.
Review parent/child relationships.

3.1.1 Understanding Parent/Child Relationships


Parent/child relationships among the address book records of your suppliers,
customers, and prospects are like family relationships. One address book record is the
parent and one or more address book records are the child of that parent. Creating
parent/child relationships can make your business more efficient. For example, you
can send billing for field offices or subsidiary companies (children) to the corporate
headquarters (parent) if you set up parent/child relationships.
After you enter address book records in the Address Book system, you can create
parent/child relationships among them. You can create these relationships for these
structures:
Accounts receivable structures.
Accounts payable structures.
Reporting structures within your organization.

Setting Up Parent/Child Relationships and Organizational Structures 3-1


Setting Up Parent/Child Relationships

3.1.2 Forms Used to Create Parent/Child Relationships

Form Name FormID Navigation Usage


Address Parent/Child W0150A Address Book Create parent/child
Revisions Organizational relationships among
Structure (G01311), address book records
Structure Revisions for suppliers,
customers, and so on.
Click Add on the
Work with
Parent/Child
Structures form.
Work With W02150A Address Book Review the parents of
Distribution Lists Organizational a child or all child
Structure menu relationships.
(G01311), Structure
Inquiry

3.1.3 Setting Processing Options for Structure Revisions (P0150)


Processing options enable you to specify the default processing for programs and
reports.

3.1.3.1 Process
1. Workflow Information
Specify whether to display workflow processing information. Values are:
Blank: Do not display workflow information
1: Display workflow information. This value determines whether the organizational
structure is a multi-level distribution list for workflow purposes. If you set the value as
1, the system creates a record in the Organizational Structure Rule table (F98845) for
the organizational model.

2. Tier Descriptions
Specify whether to allow a tier structure to be defined based on effective dates for a
root parent address. The root parent in a structure is the highest level of a parent/child
structure, and can have no parent. Values are:
Blank: Do not allow a tier structure to be defined.
1: Allow a tier structure to be defined.

3.1.3.2 Defaults
1. Date Defaults
Specify whether the system supplies default dates on the P0150 parent/child revisions
form when the beginning and ending effective dates are omitted. Values are:
Blank: The system does not supply default dates.
1: The system supplies default dates.

2. Default Organization Structure Type


Specify the value that the system enters in the Organizational Structure field when the
A/B Org Structure Browse program (P0150) is first run. If you leave this processing
option blank, the system does not provide a default value for the organization
structure type.

3-2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Setting Up Parent/Child Relationships

3.1.4 Setting Processing Options for Structure Inquiry (P02150)


Processing options enable you to specify the default processing for programs and
reports.

3.1.4.1 Defaults
1. Enter the default Structure Type
Specify a valid structure type from user-defined code (UDC) table (01/TS). A structure
type identifies a type of organizational structure that has its own hierarchy in the JD
Edwards Address Book system (for example, E-mail).
When you create a parent/child relationship for the JD Edwards Accounts Receivable
system, the structure type must be omitted.

2. Enter the version of Organizational Structure Revisions to be called. If left blank,


version ZJDE0001 will be used.
Specify a version of the Organizational Structure Revisions program for the system to
use. The version indicates a specific set of data selection and sequencing settings for
the application. Versions may be named using any combination of alphabetic and
numeric characters.

3.1.5 Creating Parent/Child Relationships


Access the Address Parent/Child Revisions form.

Figure 31 Address Parent/Child Revisions form

Note: The Escalation Hours and Escalation Minutes fields are not
used by the JD Edwards Address Book system.

Parent Number
Enter the address book number of the parent entity (for example, parent company).
The system uses this number to associate a particular address with a parent entity or
location. Any value that you enter in this field updates the Address Organizational
Structure Master table (F0150) for the specified structure type. This address number
must exist in the Address Book Master table (F0101). Examples of address book
records that would have a parent number include:
Subsidiaries with parent companies
Branches with a home office
Job sites with a general contractor

Setting Up Parent/Child Relationships and Organizational Structures 3-3


Setting Up Parent/Child Relationships

On the Address Parent/Child form, enter the address book number of the primary
level in a hierarchy, or reporting relationship. A parent in one hierarchy can be a child
in another hierarchy. A hierarchy can be organized by business unit, employee, or
position. For example, you can create a hierarchy that displays the reporting
relationships between employees and supervisors.

Structure Type
Enter a UDC (01/TS) to identify a type of organizational structure that has its own
hierarchy in the JD Edwards Address Book system (for example, E-mail).
When you create a parent/child relationship for the JD Edwards Accounts Receivable
system, the structure type must be omitted.
The Structure Type data item Identifies the type of distribution list, such as WFS for
workflow, ORG for group, and EML for E-mail.

Address Number
Enter a valid address book number. This number identifies an entry in the JD Edwards
Address Book system, such as employee, applicant, participant, customer, supplier,
tenant, or location.

Group
Enter a number for the group. This number reorders a group of records on the form.

Begin Eff Date (beginning effective date)


Enter a valid date. This is the date on which the address number appears in the
structure. The Beginning Effective Date field prevents the address number from
occurring in the structure until the beginning effective date is the same as the current
date.
If you select the processing option for tier descriptions in the Structure Revisions
program (P0150), you must complete this field.
If this field is left blank, the address number always occurs in a structure unless an
ending effective date exists.

End Eff Date (ending effective date)


Enter the date on which the address book record will cease to exist in the structure.

3.1.6 Reviewing Parent/Child Relationships


Access the Work With Distribution Lists form.

3-4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Setting Up Tiers for Parent/Child Organizational Structures

Figure 32 Work With Distribution Lists form

To review parent/child relationships:


1. Change the value in the Structure Type field, if necessary.
The default organization structure type is specified in a processing option.
2. To review all child relationships, click the folders that have + to the left of the
names in the detail area.
3. To review the parents of a child, complete the remaining steps.
4. Select the Parents option.
5. Enter a child address book number in the Parent Number field and click Find.

3.2 Setting Up Tiers for Parent/Child Organizational Structures


This section provides an overview of tiers for parent/child organizational structures,
lists a prerequisite, and discusses how to:
Build an organizational structure using tiers.
Determine the root parent in an organizational structure as of a specific date.
Enter tier descriptions for an organizational structure.

3.2.1 Understanding Tiers for Parent/Child Organizational Structures


The JD Edwards Address Book system provides tiers as a way to control a structure of
parent/child relationships. When you set up tiers, you specify:
Only one parent for any child on any date.
Beginning and ending effective dates for the relationship between a parent and
child.
Names for the tiers of an organizational structure, for example CEO as level 1, Vice
Presidents as level 2, Managers as level 3, and so on. Each tier can have a
beginning and ending effective date.
This diagram shows an organizational structure that is set up using tiers. The parent
(1001) has three children (4343, 3480, 3333). Each of these children is a parent to other
children. Parent 4343 has two children (1002, 4242), parent 3480 has one child (3008),

Setting Up Parent/Child Relationships and Organizational Structures 3-5


Setting Up Tiers for Parent/Child Organizational Structures

and parent 3333 has three children (3434, 3121, 3002). With tiers, each child can have
only one parent.

Figure 33 Parent/child tiers

1001 Customer

4343 3480 3333 Warehouse

1002 4242 3008 3434 3121 3002 Distributor

Important: If you select the processing option and create


parent/child organization structures with tiers, and later clear the
processing option, be aware of the potential risks. If you do this, you
might mistakenly add multiple parents to a child or enter effective
dates that overlap for a parent/child relationship or a tier structure.

The organizational structure type is defined in UDC table 01/TS (Structure Type).

3.2.2 Prerequisite
Before you complete the tasks in this section, you must define organization structure
types in UDC table 01/TS.

3.2.3 Forms Used to Set Up Tiers for Parent/Child Organizational Structures

Form Name FormID Navigation Usage


Work with W0150D Address Book Create parent/child
Parent/Child Organizational relationships among
Structures Structure (G01311), address book records
Structure Revisions for suppliers,
customers, and so on.
Address Parent/Child W0150A Click Add on the Build an
Revisions Work with organizational
Parent/Child structure using tiers.
Structures form.
Effective Date Parent W0150F Select a record and, Determine the root
Search from the Row menu parent in an
on the Work with organizational
Parent/Child structure as of a
Structures form, select specific date.
Tier Descriptions

3-6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Setting Up Tiers for Parent/Child Organizational Structures

Form Name FormID Navigation Usage


Tier Description W0150E Select the Find Root Enter tier descriptions
Revisions Parent Address for an organizational
option, and click OK structure.
on the Work with
Parent/Child
Structures form.

3.2.4 Building an Organizational Structure Using Tiers


Access the Address Parent/Child Revisions form.

Parent Number
Enter the address book number of the primary level in a hierarchy, or reporting
relationship. A parent in one hierarchy can be a child in another hierarchy. A hierarchy
can be organized by business unit, employee, or position. For example, you can create
a hierarchy that shows the reporting relationships between employees and
supervisors.
For each child of the parent specified in this field, complete the Address Number,
Begin Eff Date, and End Eff Date fields.

Address Number
Enter an address book number. This number identifies an entry in the JD Edwards
Address Book system, such as employee, applicant, participant, customer, supplier,
tenant, or location.
To continue to build the organizational structure, use the child specified in this field as
the parent of other children, then another child as the parent of other children, and so
on.

Begin Eff Date (beginning effective date)


Enter the date on which the address number appears in the structure. The Beginning
Effective Date field prevents the address number from occurring in the structure until
the beginning effective date is the same as the current date.
If this field is left blank, the address number always occurs in a structure unless an
ending effective date exists.

End Eff Date (ending effective date)


Enter the date on which the address book record will cease to exist in the structure.

3.2.5 Determining the Root Parent in an Organizational Structure as of a Specific Date


Access the Effective Date Parent Search form.

Effective Date
Enter the effective date to use when searching for the parent. The system uses the
current date as the default value. Verify the date and change it, if necessary.

Root Parent Address


Select the Find Root Parent Address option to display the parent address number in
this field.
The address book number displayed is the parent entity for that date.

Setting Up Parent/Child Relationships and Organizational Structures 3-7


Setting Up Enhanced Parent/Child Relationships

3.2.6 Entering Tier Descriptions for an Organizational Structure


Access the Tier Description Revisions form.
Complete the following fields only for the root parent that you select, not for all root
parents.

Tier No.(tier number)


Enter the number for the tier. This number represents the tier level in the structure at
and below which the system applies this adjustment. This number must be equal to or
less than the value specified in the Accumulate at Tier field. In a buying structure, a
tier level value of 1 represents the top or highest level. A tier level with a greater
numeric value than 1 represents a lower level in the buying structure.

Effective Date
Enter the date when a transaction, contract, obligation, preference, or policy rule
becomes effective.

Expiration Date
Enter the date on which a transaction, text message, agreement, obligation, or
preference has expired or been completed.

3.3 Setting Up Enhanced Parent/Child Relationships


This section provides an overview of enhanced parent/child relationships, lists a
prerequisite, and discusses how to create enhanced parent/child relationships.

3.3.1 Understanding Enhanced Parent/Child Relationships


You use the Enhanced Parent/Child Relationships program (P01501) to create
organizational structures between an address book number and one or more who's
who entries. These organizational structures identify an address book number as a
parent and one or more address book numbers that are attached to who's who entries
as children. For example, you can create an enhanced parent/child organizational
structure to set up a project. You identify an address book number as the parent and
then identify individuals (who's who entries) as members of the project. The who's
who entries can be attached to the parent address book number as well as other
address book numbers.
Enhanced parent/child relationships are stored in the Enhanced Parent Child table
(F01501).

3.3.2 Prerequisite
Before you complete the tasks in this section, you must set up codes for enhanced
parent/child structure types in UDC table 01/TS.

3-8 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Setting Up Enhanced Parent/Child Relationships

3.3.3 Form Used to Set Up Enhanced Parent/Child Relationships

Form Name FormID Navigation Usage


Enhanced W01501B Daily Processing Create enhanced
Parent/Child menu (G0110), parent/child
Revision Address Book relationships.
Revisions
Select a record on the
Work With Addresses
form, and then select
Who's Who from the
Row menu.
Select Enhanced
Parent/Cld from the
Form menu on the
Who's Who form.
Click Add on the
Work with Enhanced
Parent/Child form.

3.3.4 Creating Enhanced Parent/Child Relationships


Access the Enhanced Parent/Child Revision form.

Parent Number
Enter the address book number of the parent company to create an enhanced
parent/child organizational structure.

Address Number
Enter the address book number. This number identifies an entry in the JD Edwards
Address Book system, such as employee, applicant, participant, customer, supplier,
tenant, or location.

Who's Who Line


Enter the line number. This field is used to identify the line ID number for a Who's
Who record.

Relation Type
Specify the type of relationship created between the two entities. Roles must be
defined in UDC 01/RT.
Example values include:
A: Administrative Assistant
B: Important Business Contact
C: Child
D: Project Lead
E: Researcher

Setting Up Parent/Child Relationships and Organizational Structures 3-9


Setting Up Enhanced Parent/Child Relationships

3-10 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


4
Entering Address Book Records
4

This chapter contains the following topics:


Section 4.1, "Understanding Address Book Information"
Section 4.2, "Entering Address Book Records"
Section 4.3, "Adding Who's Who Information to Address Book Records"
Section 4.4, "Printing the Check for Duplicates Report"
Section 4.5, "Building the Address Book Word Search Table"

See Also:
"Entering Additional Address Book Information for Chile" in the
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Localizations for Chile
Implementation Guide.
"Setting Up Address Book Information for Colombia" in the JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Localizations for Colombia
Implementation Guide.
"Entering Additional Address Book Information for Ecuador" in
the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Localizations for Ecuador
Implementation Guide.
"Entering Additional Address Book Information for Peru" in
theJD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Localizations for Peru
Implementation Guide
"Entering Additional Address Book Information for Poland" in the
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Localizations for Poland
Implementation Guide.
"Entering Address Book Information for Russia" in theJD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Applications Localizations for Russia Implementation
Guide.
"Entering Address Book Information for Venezuela" in the JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Localizations for Venezuela
Implementation Guide.

4.1 Understanding Address Book Information


You use the JD Edwards Address Book system to maintain information about
companies and people with whom you do business. The Address Book contains
company names, contact names, addresses, phone numbers, notes, and other pertinent
information, and is used by most other JD Edwards EnterpriseOne systems.

Entering Address Book Records 4-1


Entering Address Book Records

This diagram illustrates the tables that the Address Book Revisions program (P01012)
uses to store and access address book information. Other Address Book programs also
use these tables:

Figure 41 Tables used by the Address Book system

4.1.1 Mobile Enterprise Applications for Address Book Information (Release 9.1
Update)
The following mobile applications are available, and can be used to view information
that is included in the address book tables on a mobile device:
Customer Account Overview (Smartphone and Tablet)
Contact Customer (Smartphone and Tablet)
Contact Supplier (Smartphone)
These applications require system administrator configuration before they are
available to individual users. Contact your system administrator to determine whether
these applications are available for use.
Additionally, see the following topics in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications
Mobile Enterprise Applications Implemenation Guide:
Mobile Applications: Customer Account Overview
Mobile Applications: Contact Customer
Mobile Applications: Contact Supplier

4.2 Entering Address Book Records


This section provides an overview of address book records and discusses how to:

4-2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Entering Address Book Records

Set processing options for Address Book MBF (P0100041).


Set processing options for Address Book Revisions (P01012).
Add address book records.
Add phone numbers to an address book record.
Add global location number (GLN) to an address book record.

4.2.1 Understanding Address Book Records


Before you can use other JD Edwards EnterpriseOne systems, you must enter address
book information in the JD Edwards Address Book system for your customers,
suppliers, and so on. Other JD Edwards EnterpriseOne systems retrieve up-to-date
name and address information, based on the address book information that you enter.
Use the Address Book Revisions program to enter address book records. The system
stores information for address book records in the Address Book Master table (F0101).
In addition to basic address information, you can enter an unlimited number of phone
numbers for each address book record and specify whether the phone number is a
business number, cellular number, fax number, and so on. Phone numbers are stored
in the Address Book - Phone Numbers table (F0115).
To locate an address book record on the Work With Addresses form, you can enter a
full or partial name, address number, and so on. If you use a partial name, you must
include an * (asterisk) either in front of or at the end of the partial name. The program
searches only for the first word in the address name. For example, if you have address
book numbers for Corporate Center, Continental Services, and Services Continental
and you search for *CO or CO*, the search results will include Corporate Center and
Continental Services.

4.2.1.1 Duplicate Entry Validation


To alleviate the potential for duplicate records when you enter, revise, or upload
address book records, you can activate duplicate record validation in the JD Edwards
Address Book system. You specify whether you want the system to issue a warning or
error message when it finds records with the same alpha name, city, and zip code
combination or the same tax ID.
The Address Book MBF program (P0100041) has two processing options that specify
whether to search for duplicate records:
Validate for Duplicate Data Entry
Identifies records with the same alpha name, city, and postal code. Records with
abbreviations are not identified. For example, Saint Petersburg and St. Petersburg
are not identified as duplicate records.
Validate for Duplicate Tax ID Entry
Identifies records with the same tax ID in the same country. Records with a blank
tax ID are not identified.
You can set either or both of these processing options to issue a warning or error
message. The system allows you to accept entries with warning messages, but not with
error messages.
For duplicate data entry validation, the system searches the F0101 and F0116 tables for
a matching alpha name, city, and zip code. For duplicate tax ID entry, the system
searches the F0101 table for a matching tax ID and the F0116 table for a matching
country.

Entering Address Book Records 4-3


Entering Address Book Records

4.2.1.2 Global Location Number


Global location numbers (GLN) are a key component in electronic transactions such as
Electronic Data Interchange (EDI). They provide a unique and efficient identification
of all locations relevant to EDI transactions. The advantage to using GLNs is that every
EDI transaction does not have to communicate information about particular locations
such as names and addresses. Organizations can communicate this information only
once, enter it onto computer files, and subsequently retrieve it by referring to a unique
GLN.
Companies involved in a variety of business activities such as life sciences, chemicals,
electronics, and pharmaceuticals, are using GLNs. The United Nations, Electronic Data
Interchange for Administration, Commerce and Transport (UN/EDIFACT) and the
International Standard Organization (ISO 6523) recognize GLNs as a viable part of the
international community in more than 100 countries
The GLN is a standard means to identify physical locations, business units, cost
centers, and so on. It is a 13-digit number composed of:
GS1 Company Prefix.
The first six digits of the GLN is the GS1 company prefix. The GS1 member
organization assigns the company prefix to ensure uniqueness of the number.

Note: You can set up your GS1 prefix in UDC table 47/LN.

Location Reference.
The following six digits represents entities within the company. Each company or
organization holding a GS1 company prefix can assign GLNs to their own
locations. The company can assign a location reference to business units within the
company.
Check Digit.
This is the final digit of the GLN number. This single digit number is calculated
according to a standard algorithm to ensure data integrity.

Figure 42 Global Location Number Structure

With JD Edwards EnterpriseOne, you can use GLNs to improve efficiency of


integrated logistics and to provide value to partners and customers. You can use a
GLN to identify:
Functional entities such as a customer service or billing department within a
company.

4-4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Entering Address Book Records

Physical entities such as a branch/plant, warehouse, or a delivery location.


External organizations such as trading partners, customers, and suppliers.
Additionally, the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne system uses GLNs for real-time events
(RTE), business services (BSSV), and EDI transactions within distribution systems such
as Sales, Procurement, and Transportation.
You can only associate a GLN with an address book number. For internal business
units you can dynamically generate GLNs by clicking a button. Additonally, you can
provide external support by manually entering GLNs to update the address book
record of the respective vendor or customer.

See Also:
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Data Interface for Electronic
Data Interchange Implemenation Guide.
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Business Services Reference
Guide.
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Real-Time Events
Implementation Guide.

4.2.2 Forms Used to Enter Address Book Records

Form Name FormID Navigation Usage


Work With Addresses W01012B Daily Processing Locate and review
(G0110), Address existing address book
Book Revisions records.
Address Book W01012A Click Add on the Add or change basic
Revision Work With Addresses address information,
form including mailing
information, for an
address book record.
Phone Numbers W0115A Select a record, and Add phone numbers
then select Phones and identify phone
from the Row menu types.
on the Work With
Addresses form.
Global Location W01012E On the Address Book Add or generate
Number Maintenance Revision form, select global location
Form Exit, GLN Entry numbers for existing
address book records.
Formatted Address W01012C Select a record, and Review the format of
then select A/B a mailing address
Revision from the before you create a
Row menu on the mailing label. The
Work With Addresses formatted address
form. Select corresponds to the
Formatted Address address format ID in
from the Form menu the Country Constant
on the Address Book Master File table
Revision form. (F0070).

4.2.3 Setting Processing Options for Address Book MBF (P0100041)


Processing options enable you to specify the default processing for programs and
reports.

Entering Address Book Records 4-5


Entering Address Book Records

4.2.3.1 Outbound
Use these processing options to specify the transaction type and transaction image to
use when creating outbound transactions. Use the processing option for transaction
type to specify the transaction type when you use the Interoperability feature. If you
leave this processing option blank, the system does not perform outbound
interoperability processing. Use the search button to locate transaction type codes.

1. Transaction Type
Specify the transaction type when using the Interoperability feature. If you leave this
field blank, the system does not perform outbound interoperability processing. Use the
search button to locate transaction type codes.

2. Change Transaction Image


Specify whether to write an image of the record before and after the record is changed.
A before image is the record before the change. An after image is the record after the
change. Values are:
Blank: Write the after image.
1: Write the before image and after image.

4.2.3.2 Defaults
Specify the default business unit to use when creating address book records.

1. Default Business Unit


Specify the business unit to use when no business unit is specified in the Address Book
Revisions program. If no value is specified for this processing option and the business
unit in the Address Book Revisions program has no value specified, the system enters
1 in the Business Unit field of the address book record.

4.2.3.3 Edits
Specify whether to search for duplicate address book records.

1. Validate for Duplicate Tax ID Entry


Specify whether the system searches for duplicate entries based on the Tax ID and
Country fields. Values are:
Blank: The system does not search for duplicate entries.
1: The system searches for duplicate entries and issues a warning message if any are
found.
2: The system searches for duplicate entries and issues an error message if any are
found.

2. Validate for Duplicate Data Entry


Specify whether the system searches for duplicate entries based on the Alpha Name,
Postal Code, and City fields. Values are:
Blank: The system does not search for duplicate entries.
1: The system searches for duplicate entries and issues a warning message if any are
found.
2: The system searches for duplicate entries and issues an error message if any are
found.

4-6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Entering Address Book Records

4.2.4 Setting Processing Options for Address Book Revisions (P01012)


Processing options enable you to specify the default processing for programs and
reports.

4.2.4.1 Entry
Use these processing options to specify which forms and fields to display when using
the Address Book Revision program. Displaying the field enables you to enter the tax
ID for an address book record.

1. Supplier Master
Specify whether to display the Supplier Master Information form when adding an
address book record. To display the Supplier Master form, you must activate this
processing option and enter Y in the Payables field. The Payables field is located on
the Additional tab on Address Book Revision. Values are:
Blank: Do not display the Supplier Master form.
1: Display the Supplier Master form.

2. Customer Master
Specify whether to display the Customer Master Information form when adding an
address book record. To display the Customer Master Information form, you must
activate this processing option and select the Receivables option on the Additional tab
on Address Book Revisions. Values are:
Blank: Do not display the Customer Master Information form.
1: Display the Customer Master Information form.

3. S/WM
Specify whether to display the CSMS (Customer Service Management System) form
when adding an address book record. To display the CSMS form, you must activate
this processing option and activate the CSF flag in the Service/Warranty Constants
table (F17001). Values are:
Blank: Do not display the CSMS form.
1: Display the CSMS form.

4. Tax ID
Specify whether to display, hide, or disable the Tax ID field on the Address Book
Revision form. Values are:
Blank: Display the Tax ID field.
1: Hide the Tax ID field.
2: Disable the Tax ID field.

4.2.4.2 Defaults
Use these processing options to specify the default search type and default type code
to be incorporated in an address book record.

1. Search Type
Specify the default value to use in the Search Type field on the Work with Addresses
form. Use the search button for a list of valid search types. If you leave this processing
option blank, the system uses * (asterisk) as the default value. The * instructs the
system to locate all address book records.

Entering Address Book Records 4-7


Entering Address Book Records

2. Type Code
Specify the value from user-defined code (UDC) 01/W0 for the system to supply as the
default in the Type Code field when you make an entry in the Address Book - Who's
Who table (F0111). Values are:
Blank: No attention line appears in a mailing address.
A: Attention Name appears in the attention line of a mailing address except where other
type codes are used.
B: Billing Name appears in the attention line of an address when bills are sent.
C: Contact Name. The name of the Internal Revenue Service (IRS) contact person that
is used in 1099 processing.
E: Emergency Contact. The person to contact whenever an emergency occurs that
involves the person or company identified in the address book record.
O: Other. This is used for all other purposes.
T: 1099 Legal Name. The name used for 1099 returns when the legal name is different
from the mailing name in the F0101 table.

4.2.4.3 Versions
Use these processing options to identify the default versions of the Address Book MBF,
Supplier Master, and the Customer Master programs to use when entering address
book records.

1. Address Book MBF (P0100041) Version


Specify the version of the Address Book MBF program (P0100041) to use. If you leave
this field blank, the system uses version ZJDE0001.

2. Customer Master (P03013) Version


Specify the version of the Customer Master program (P03013) to use when you add or
change address book information. If you leave this field blank, the system uses version
ZJDE0001.

3. Supplier Master (P04012) Version


Specify the version of the Supplier Master program (P04012) to use when adding or
revising address book information. If you leave this field blank, the system uses the
default version, ZJDE0001.

4.2.4.4 Process
Use these processing options to identify the features to activate on the Address Book
Revision form.

1. Self Service
Specify whether to activate the Self Service functionality for JAVA/HTML. Self Service
enables customers and suppliers to modify their existing address and mailing
information using the internet. Values are:
Blank: Do not activate Self Service.
1: Activate for customers.
2: Activate for suppliers.

2. Postal Code Editing


Specify whether to activate postal code editing. Postal code editing verifies that the
postal code exists in the F0117 table. If the postal code exists in the F0117 table and the

4-8 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Entering Address Book Records

City, County, Country, and State fields are blank, the system uses the information from
the F0117 table. If the postal code does not exist in the F0117 table, the system issues a
warning message. Values are:
Blank or 0: Do not activate postal code editing.
1: Activate postal code editing.

3. Postal Code Address Retrieval


Specify whether to activate address retrieval of postal codes. If the postal code is valid
and address lines 1 through 4 are blank, the system can retrieve address information
from the F0118 table. If you activate postal code address retrieval, you must set the
Postal Code Editing processing option to 1 to activate postal code editing. Values are:
Blank or 0: Do not activate postal code address retrieval.
1: Activate postal code address retrieval and use the Postal Code Selection window for
multiple addresses. All available addresses for the postal code appear.
2: Activate postal code address book retrieval to retrieve the address information for a
single address.

4.2.5 Adding Address Book Records


Access the Address Book Revision form.

Figure 43 Address Book Revision form

Address Number
Enter a number to identify an entry in the Address Book, such as employee, applicant,
participant, customer, supplier, tenant, or location. If you leave this field blank, the
system assigns the address book number for you.

4.2.5.1 Address Book


Select the Address Book tab.

Entering Address Book Records 4-9


Entering Address Book Records

Alpha Name
Enter text to name or describe an address. This 40-character alphabetic field appears
on a number of forms and reports. You can enter dashes, commas, and other special
characters, but the system cannot search on them when you use this field to search for
a name.
If you leave this field blank, the system assigns the value entered in the Mailing Name
field.
If duplicate data entry validation is activated and another record with the same alpha
name, city, and postal code is found, the system highlights this field and issues an
error or warning message.

Note: The system performs duplicate data entry validation on only


who's who record 0.

Long Address Number


Enter a user-defined name or number to identify an address book record. You can use
this number to locate and enter information about the address book record. If you
enter a value other than the address book number (AN8), such as the long address or
tax ID, you must precede it with the special character that is defined in the Address
Book constants. When the system locates the record, it returns the address book
number to the field.
For example, if address book number 4100 (Total Solutions) has a long address TOTAL
and an * (asterisk) distinguishes it from other entries (as defined in the Address Book
constants), you could enter *TOTAL into the field, and the system would return 4100.

Tax ID
Enter the identification code that is required by various tax authorities. This can be a
Social Security Number, federal or state corporate tax ID, sales tax number, and so on.
The system verifies the number and prints the separators in their correct format,
according to the value of TAXC (Person/Corporation Code). If no value exists for
TAXC, the system uses the corporate entity.
If duplicate tax-ID validation is activated and another record with the same tax ID and
country is found, the system highlights this field and issues an error or warning
message.
Tax ID information can vary by country.

See Also:
"Understanding Tax Information for Address Book Records for Brazil" in the
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Localizations for Brazil Implementation
Guide,
"Understanding Additional Address Book Information for Chile" in the JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Localizations for Chile Implementation Guide,
"Understanding Address Book Information for Colombia" in the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Applications Localizations for Colombia Implementation Guide,
"Understanding Address Book Information for Venezuela" in the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Applications Localizations for Venezuela Implementation Guide

Search Type
Select a value from UDC table 01/ST to specify the kind of address book record to
search for. Examples include:
C: Customer

4-10 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Entering Address Book Records

E: Employee
O: Company
TAX: Tax authority
V: Supplier

Business Unit
Enter an alphanumeric code to identify a separate entity within a business for which
you want to track costs. For example, a business unit might be a warehouse location,
job, project, work center, branch, or plant.
You can assign a business unit to a document, entity, or person for purposes of
responsibility reporting. For example, the system provides reports of open accounts
payable and accounts receivable by business unit to track equipment by responsible
department.
Business unit security might prevent you from viewing information about business
units for which you have no authority.
If you leave the Business Unit field blank, the system uses the default business unit
from the Address Book MBF. If you do not enter a default business unit in the MBF
processing option, the system uses the default value 1. You must set up any business
unit that you enter, including the default value 1, in the Business Unit Master table
(F0006) table.

4.2.5.2 Mailing
Select the Mailing tab.

Address Line 1
Enter the first line of the mailing address for an employee, customer, or supplier in
Address Book. The IRS restricts the size of the address that prints on an employee's
year-end tax return. To comply with IRS regulations, the system has the following
restrictions:
On W-2 returns, the system prints only the last three nonblank address lines plus the
city, state, and postal code.
On 1099 returns, the system prints only the last nonblank address line plus the city,
state, and postal code.
On other U.S. federal magnetic media, the system prints only the last nonblank
address line plus the city, state, and postal code.

City
Enter the name that indicates the city that is associated with the address.

State
Select a state or province from UDC00/S. This code is usually a postal service
abbreviation.

Postal Code
Enter the United States ZIP code or the postal code that specifies where a letter is to be
routed. Attach this code to the address for delivery in other countries. The system uses
this code as the low-end value when processing Postal Code Transaction ranges.
If you set up postal code processing, enter only the address and postal code. The
system retrieves the city, state, country, and county values from the F0117 and F0118
tables.

Entering Address Book Records 4-11


Entering Address Book Records

Country
Select a country from UDC 00/CN. The country code has no effect on currency
conversion.
The Address Book system uses the country code for data selection and address
formatting.

County
Enter the name of a county, parish, or other political district that is necessary for the
address or for tax purposes.

4.2.5.3 Additional 1
Select the Additional 1 tab.

Payables Y/N/M (payables yes/no/miscellaneous)


Specify whether the address book record is a supplier. Values are:
Y: Yes, this is a supplier. A processing option specifies whether the supplier master
record appears automatically after you add an address.
N: No, this is not a supplier. This code does not prevent you from entering a voucher
for the address.
M: This is a miscellaneous, one-time supplier. This code does not prevent you from
entering multiple vouchers for the address.
F: This is a supplier with a foreign address. The IRS requires U.S. companies to
identify suppliers with foreign addresses for 1099 reporting.
You should assign tax authorities as suppliers. This enables you to make tax payment
to tax authorities.
Code N is informational only unless you set a processing option. In this case, a
warning message appears if both the Payables and Receivables fields are N.

Employee Group Approvals


Enter the group to which the employee is assigned. The system uses this value in
approval processing for workflow.

AR/AP Netting (Accounts Receivable/Accounts Payable netting)


Select to specify whether customers and suppliers are eligible for AR/AP netting. If
you select this option, the system updates invoices and vouchers that are entered for
the address number with a value of 1 (Eligible for Netting) in the Netting Status field.
If you do not select this option, the system updates invoices and vouchers that are
entered for the address number with a value of 0 (Ineligible for Netting) in the Netting
Status field.

Add'l Ind Tax ID (additional individual tax ID)


Enter an identification number that is assigned by a tax authority to an individual, in
addition to the primary tax ID number (TX1).

Tax Exempt Certificate


Enter the number that tax authorities issue to tax-exempt individuals and companies
to identify their tax-exempt status.

Person/Corporation Code
Specify the type of taxpayer. For 1099 reporting for U.S. suppliers and foreign
suppliers, the system selects only records with a code of P or N. Values for U.S. entities
are:

4-12 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Entering Address Book Records

Blank or C: Corporate entity (the tax ID prints as 12-3456789)


P: Individual (the tax ID prints as 123-45-6789)
N: Noncorporate entity (the tax ID prints as 12-3456789)
Values for non-U.S. entities are:
1: Individual.
2: Corporate entity.
3: Both an individual and a corporate entity.
4: Noncorporate entity.
5: Customs authority.

Credit Message
Select a value from UDC table 00/CM to indicate the credit status of a customer or
supplier. Examples are:
1: Over credit limit.
2: Requires purchase order.
3: Not on contract maintenance agreement.
The credit message appears on inquiry and transaction entry forms in the JD Edwards
Accounts Payable, Sales Order Management, and Procurement systems. The system
displays the temporary credit message in the JD Edwards Accounts Receivable system.

Language
Select a value from UDC table 01/LP to specify the language to use on forms and
printed reports. Before you specify a language, a code for that language must exist at
either the system level or in your user preferences.

Industry Classification
Specify the code that classifies goods and services. This code can be in the format of
any one of the following systems of classification:
Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) or North American Industry Classification
System (NAICS): A numerical system that is used in the United States to classify goods
and services. This code is four (SIC) or six (NAICS) digits.
Harmonized System (HS): The international method of classifying goods. More than
fifty countries use this code. It can be up to 10 digits.
Standard Industrial Trade Classification (SITC): A numerical code system that was
developed by the United Nations to classify goods used in international trade.
International organizations use this code. It can be up to six digits.

Receivables Y/N
Select to specify whether the address book record is a customer. A processing option
specifies whether the customer master record appears automatically after you add an
address.

User Code
Enter information that is pertinent to your business. No predefined definitions exist
for this option.

Entering Address Book Records 4-13


Entering Address Book Records

Subledger Inactive Code


Specify that an address book record can be used as a subledger in the JD Edwards
General Accounting system. Any value other than blank indicates that a subledger is
inactive.
Examples include jobs that are closed, employees that have been terminated, or assets
that have been disposed. If a subledger becomes active again, set this field back to
blank.
To use subledger information in the tables for reports but prevent transactions from
posting to the record in the Account Balances table (F0902), enter a value other than
blank in this field

Employee Y/N
Select this option to indicate that the address book record is for an employee. This field
is for informational purposes only.

4.2.5.4 Additional 2
Select the Additional 2 tab.

Classification Code 1 through Classification Code 5


Use these fields to further classify address book records. For example, you can specify
that a business is minority, female, or small business-owned. Set up UDC tables 01/CA
through 01/CE to provide values for each of these fields.

Ticker
Enter the stock ticker symbol for the customer or supplier.

Stock Exchange
Enter the exchange on which the customer or supplier's stock is traded.

Year Started
Enter the year in which the company became a customer.

Revenue Range
Select a value from UDC table 01/RR to specify the range of revenue for the customer
or supplier.

Growth Rate
Enter the growth rate for the customer or supplier. Enter up to 10 numeric characters
to represent the growth rate.

Number of Employee
Enter the number of people who are employed by the customer or supplier.

DUNS Number
Enter the DUNS number for the customer or supplier.

4.2.5.5 Related Address


Select the Related Address tab.

Parent Number
Enter the address book number of the parent company. The system uses this number
to associate a particular address with a parent company or location. Any value that
you enter in this field updates the Address Organizational Structure Master table
(F0150) for the blank structure type. This address number must exist in the F0101 table

4-14 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Entering Address Book Records

for validation purposes. Examples of address book records that would have a parent
number include:
Subsidiaries with parent companies.
Branches with a home office.
Job sites with a general contractor.
To specify additional relationships between the primary address and other related
addresses, complete this field.

1st Address Number


Enter an alternate address number in the JD Edwards Address Book system. You can
use this field for any secondary business address that relates to the primary address.
For example:
Salesperson
Law firm
Accountant
Securities agent
Bonding agent
If you leave this field blank on an entry form, the system supplies the primary address
from the Address Number field.
To specify additional relationships between the primary address and other related
addresses, complete this field.

Factor/Special Payee
Enter an address book number to identify a special payment address for accounts
payable.
This number must exist in the F0101 table for validation purposes. If you leave this
field blank on an entry form, the system supplies the primary address from the
Address Number field.

4.2.5.6 Category Code 1-10 and Cat Code 11-30


Select the Cat Code 1 - 10 tab or the Cat Code 11-30 tab.

Category Code 01
Use these codes to group address book records for reports, mailings, and so on.
Category codes are user-defined (system 01, types 01 through 30). Examples of
category codes include:
Category code 01
Location or Branch
Category code 02
Salesperson
Category code 03
Product
Category code 04
Credit officer
Values entered in these fields must exist in the corresponding UDC table.

Entering Address Book Records 4-15


Adding Who's Who Information to Address Book Records

4.2.6 Adding Phone Numbers to an Address Book Record


Access the Phone Numbers form.

Prefix
Enter the first segment of a telephone number. In the United States, the prefix is the
three-digit area code.

Phone Number
Enter the phone number without the prefix or special characters, such as hyphens or
periods, that makes up the telephone number for an entity. You can use any applicable
telephone number format for a country. This field is used in conjunction with the
Prefix field (AR1), where you enter the first segment of the telephone number, which is
called the area code in the United States.
When you search for an address using a phone number, you must enter the number
exactly as it is set up in the JD Edwards Address Book system, including any special
characters.

Phone Type
Select a value from UDC table 01/PH to indicate either the location or use of a
telephone number. Examples include Business, FAX, and Cellular.

4.2.7 Adding a GLN to an Address Book Record


Access the Global Location Number Maintenance form.

Global Location Number


Enter a value for global location number. You manually enter the GLN provided to
you by an external customer or vendor. If you enter a value with less than 13 digits,
the system adds preceding zeroes to complete the GLN value.
If you manually enter a duplicate GLN, the system performs a validation check and
displays an error message indicating that you are attempting to enter a duplicate GLN.

Generate Internal GLN


Click the Generate Internal GLN button to generate a GLN for address book numbers
associated with internal business units, locations, and so on. To use the Generate
Internal GLN option, you must set up your GS1 Company Prefix in UDC table 47/LN.
The system uses this prefix along with next number functionality to assign internal
GLNs to locations, business units, and so on.

4.3 Adding Who's Who Information to Address Book Records


This section provides an overview of who's who information and discusses how to:
Set processing options for Who's Who MBF PO (P0100087).
Add a who's who record.
Add phone numbers to who's who records.
Add electronic address information to who's who records.
Add related person information to who's who records.
Add alternate address information to who's who records.

4-16 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Adding Who's Who Information to Address Book Records

4.3.1 Understanding Who's Who Information


After you enter an address book record, you can specify the names of individuals
associated with that address on a who's who record. Each who's who record can
contain business and personal information, mailing information, and a type code to
identify the entry. This information is stored in the Address Book - Who's Who table.
For each who's who record, you specify a type code that identifies the person's
relationship with the address. For example, if you enter a person with whom you
discuss billing information, you would enter type code B (billing) for that person. You
can use a type code to specify which who's who entry to print on labels and to use for
mailing addresses.
When you enter information for a who's who record, you also can create an
organization structure that represents the relationship between address book numbers
and who's who entries.
After you create who's who records, you can attach additional information to each
record, including:
Phone numbers
Electronic addresses
Related person information
Alternate address information

4.3.1.1 Phone Numbers for Who's Who Records


For each who's who entry, you can enter one or more phone numbers. When you enter
phone information, the system attaches the who's who line ID to the appropriate
address book number. Phone information for who's who entries is stored in the
Address Book - Phone Numbers table.

4.3.1.2 Electronic Addresses for Who's Who Records


For each who's who entry, you can enter one or more electronic mail and internet
addresses. The electronic mail address is used by other JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
systems such as the Workflow Management and Service Management systems.
Electronic mail information for who's who entries is stored in the Electronic Address
table (F01151).

4.3.1.3 Related Person Information for Who's Who Records


For each who's who entry, you can create a list of related people. For example, you can
enter the name of an administrative assistant for a who's who record. You can also
attach phone numbers to each related person record. Related person information is
stored in the Related Person table (F01112).
When you enter contact information, you can also create an organization structure that
represents the relationship between address book numbers and who's who entries.

4.3.1.4 Alternate Address Information for Who's Who Records


For each who's who record, you can enter multiple addresses. Within the list of
alternate addresses, you can specify a primary address. Alternate address information
is stored in the Alternate Address table (F01161).

Entering Address Book Records 4-17


Adding Who's Who Information to Address Book Records

4.3.2 Forms Used to Add Who's Who Information to Address Book Records

Form Name FormID Navigation Usage


Work With Addresses W01012B Daily Processing Locate and review
(G0110), Address existing address book
Book Revision records.
Who's Who W0111A Select a record, and Specify the names of
then select Who's people who are
Who from the Row associated with an
menu on the Work address.
With Addresses form.
Who's Who Detail W0111B Select a record, and Add detailed address
then select Who's information to a
Who from the Row specific line of a who's
menu on the Work who record.
With Addresses form.
Select a record in the
detail area on the
Who's Who form, and
then select Detail from
the Row menu.
Phone Numbers W0115A Select a record on the Add phone numbers
Who's Who form, and to the who's who or
select Phones from the related person record.
Row menu.
Select a record on the
Related Person form
and select Phones
from the Row menu.
E-mail/Internet W01111I Select a record on the Add electronic
Revisions Who's Who form, and addresses to the who's
select E-mail/Internet who record.
from the Row menu.
Related Person W01111F Select a record on the Add related person
Who's Who form, and information to the
select Related Person who's who record.
from the Row menu.
Related Person Details W01111H Select a related person Enter detailed
record on the Related information for a
Person form, and related person record.
select Detail from the
Row menu.
Alternate Address W01111E Select a record on the Add alternate address
Who's Who form, and to who's who records.
select Alternate
Enter the effective
Address from the
date and address type
Row menu.
before using the
Alternate Address
Details form to enter
the address
information.
Alternate Address W01111D Select a record on the Enter detailed
Details Alternate Address information for an
form, and select alternate address.
Details from the Row
menu.

4-18 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Adding Who's Who Information to Address Book Records

4.3.3 Setting Processing Options for Who's Who MBF PO (P0100087)


Access these processing options using the Interactive Versions program.

4.3.3.1 Interoperability
1. Transaction Type
Specify the transaction type for who's who information.

2. Image processing (for outbound only)


Specify whether the system writes a record of the who's who information before the
change, in addition to writing a record after the change. The system writes these
records in the Batch - Who's Who Information table (F0111Z1) when outbound
interoperability processing is enabled. Values are:
Blank: Write the after image only. The system writes the who's who record only after it
has been changed, and does not write a before image record.
1: Write the before image and the after image. The system writes two who's who
records, one before the information was changed, and one after the information was
changed.

4.3.4 Adding a Who's Who Record


Access the Who's Who Detail form

4.3.4.1 Details
Select the Details tab. The JD Edwards Address Book system assigns each who's who
entry a line ID. The system assigns line ID 0 (zero) to the first who's who record for the
address book number.

Mailing Name
Enter the name that you want to print on correspondence with the contact.

Alpha Name
Enter text to name or describe an address. This 40-character alphabetic field appears
on a number of forms and reports. You can enter dashes, commas, and other special
characters, but the system cannot search on them when you use this field to search for
a name.
If you leave this field blank, the system assigns the value entered in the Mailing Name
field.
If duplicate data entry validation is activated and the system finds another record with
the same alpha name, city, and postal code, the system highlights this field and issues
an error or warning message.

Title
Enter the professional title of a who's who person.

Type Code
Select a value from UDC table 01/W0 to identify the who's who record. Examples
include:
A: Attention name
B: Billing
C: Contact name

Entering Address Book Records 4-19


Adding Who's Who Information to Address Book Records

E: Emergency contact
O: Other
T: 1099 legal name

Contact Type
Select a value from UDC table 01/CT to describe a who's who record. Examples
include:
C: Competitor
D: Decision maker
I: Influencer
R: Recommender

Function Code
Select a value from UDC table 01/FC to specify the function that the who's who record
performs in the company. Examples include:
CO: Chief Officer
CON: Consultant
DIR: Director
MGR: Manager
STAF: Staff
SUPR: Supervisor

Preferred Contact Method


Select a value from UDC table 01/CQ to specify the desired contact method for the
contact. Examples include:
E: E-mail
F: Fax
C: Phone
W: Address
P: Pager

Primary Contact
Select this option to indicate that the individual is the primary contact. The system
allows only one primary contact per contact type.

4.3.4.2 Additional
Select the Additional tab.

Given Name, Middle Name, and Surname


Enter the first, middle, and last name of an individual. These fields are informational
only and do not appear on any reports. You can enter the name or an initial for the
middle name.

Salutation Name
Specify the name that you would use to address an individual in written
correspondence. Examples include Ms. Green, Dr. Strasheim, or Herr Obermeyer. This
field is informational only and is not used in any reports.

4-20 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Adding Who's Who Information to Address Book Records

Nickname
Specify the nickname of an individual. This value is attached to a who's who line of an
address book number.

Gender
Specify the gender of the individual. Values are:
1: Male
2: Female
3: Unknown

Remark
Enter up to 40 characters to further identify the who's who record.

Display Sequence
Enter a number that specifies the order of a group of records on the form.

Day/Month/Year of Birth
Enter the month, day, and year of the individual's birthday.

4.3.4.3 Category Codes


Select the Category Codes tab.

Category Code 001 through Category Code 20


Enter one or more of 20 reporting codes that you can assign to names in the Who's
Who list. You can use these codes to identify names for special mailing lists, phone
directories, and so on. Category codes are UDCs. Examples might include:
01: New contact or employee.
02: Holiday card mailing list.
03: Alumni mailing list.
04: Credit officer.

4.3.5 Adding Phone Numbers to Who's Who Records


Access the Phone Numbers form.

Prefix
Enter the first segment of a telephone number. In the United States, the prefix is the
three-digit area code.

Phone Number
Enter the phone number without the prefix or special characters, such as hyphens or
periods, that comprises the telephone number for an entity. You can use any applicable
telephone number format for a country. This field is used in conjunction with the
Prefix field (AR1), where you enter the first segment of the telephone number, which is
called the area code in the United States.
When you search for an address using a phone number, you must enter the number
exactly as it is set up in Address Book, including any special characters.

Phone Type
Select a valid phone type from UDC table 01/PH to indicate either the location or use
of a telephone number. Examples include:
Blank: Business telephone number

Entering Address Book Records 4-21


Adding Who's Who Information to Address Book Records

FAX: Fax telephone number


HOM: Home telephone number

4.3.6 Adding Electronic Address Information to Who's Who Records


Access the E-mail/Internet Revisions form.

Electronic Address Type


Select a valid electronic address type. Examples include Business and Internal
address.
Valid values for the electronic address type are hard-coded and are stored in UDC
table 01/ET.

Electronic Address
Enter the E-mail address or Uniform Resource Locator (URL) for either an individual
or an entity.

Messaging Indicator
Select a value from UDC table 01/HI. The messaging system uses this value to
determine whether the system sends messages to the E-mail address that you
specified. Values are:
00: E-mail will not be sent to the specified E-mail address.
01: E-mail will be sent to the specified E-mail address.

Electronic Address Category


Specify the purpose for the electronic address. This field is reserved for future use.

4.3.7 Adding Related Person Information to Who's Who Records


Access the Related Person Details form.

4.3.7.1 Personal
Access the Personal tab.

Related Person
Enter the name of the person in the F01112 table that is tied to the Who's Who record.

Relation Type
Select a value from UDC table 01/RT to indicate the relationship between the contact
and a name in the F01112 table. Values include:
A: Administrative Assistant
B: Important Business Contact
C: Child
D: Project Lead
E: Researcher

Day of Birth
Enter a number to specify the day portion for the Date of Birth field. For example, if
the birth date is February 5, 1973, you would enter 05 in this field.

4-22 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Printing the Check for Duplicates Report

Month of Birth
Enter a number to specify the month portion for the Date of Birth field. For example, if
the birth date is February 5, 1973, you would enter 02 in this field.

Year of Birth
Enter a number to specify the year portion for the Date of Birth field. For example, if
the birth date is February 5, 1973, you would enter 1973 in this field.

4.3.7.2 Cat Codes


Access the Cat Codes tab.

Category Code 1 through Category Code 5


Enter codes from UDC tables 01/P1 through 01/P5 in these fields for reporting
purposes. For example, you might set up Related Person category codes for sales force,
region, and so on.

4.3.8 Adding Alternate Address Information to Who's Who Records


Access the Alternate Address form.

Effective Date and Address Type


Enter the values in these fields on the Alternate Address form. These fields are not
required.

Main Address Flag


Select this option to indicate that an address is the main address for an entity. You can
select this option for only one address.

Address Line 1 through Address Line 4


Enter the related address for the entity.

4.4 Printing the Check for Duplicates Report


This section provides an overview of the Check for Duplicates report and discusses
how to:
Run the Check for Duplicates report.
Set data selection for the Check for Duplicates report.
Set processing options for the Address - Check for Duplicates report (R014052).

4.4.1 Understanding the Check for Duplicates Report


To verify that you do not have duplicate information in the JD Edwards Address Book
system, print the Check for Duplicates report (R014052). If you have recently
converted to JD Edwards EnterpriseOne, you should print this report to verify that
you did not create duplicate records during the initial setup of the JD Edwards
Address Book system. After reviewing this report, delete any duplicate address book
records. You cannot delete records that have transaction detail.
You can set processing options to print duplicate information for alpha names only for
duplicate postal codes and phone numbers with the same alpha name.
This report uses information from these tables:
Address Book Master (F0101)
Address by Date (F0116)

Entering Address Book Records 4-23


Building the Address Book Word Search Table

4.4.2 Running the Check for Duplicates Report


Select Periodic Processing (G0121), Check for Duplicates.

4.4.3 Setting Data Sequence for the Check for Duplicates Report
Data sequencing by alpha name is case-sensitive. To compare duplicates, you should
use one of these sequences:

Sequence Column Description


Alpha name only Description-Compressed
Alpha name and postal code Description-Compressed
Postal Code

Data sequencing for the Check for Duplicates Report is available only in the JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne Windows environment.

4.4.4 Setting Processing Options for Address Book - Check for Duplicates (R014052)
Processing options enable you to specify the default processing for programs and
reports.

4.4.4.1 Process
1. Duplicate Alpha Name Characters
Specify the number of characters (up to 25) that the program includes when it searches
for duplicate alpha names. If you leave this field blank, the default number is the first
five characters.

2. Duplicate Postal Codes


Specify whether the program searches for duplicate postal codes for the same alpha
name. Values are:
Blank: Do not search for duplicate postal codes.
1: Search for duplicate postal codes.

3. Contact Information
Specify whether to print who's who contact titles on the report. Values are:
Blank: Do not print contact titles.
1: Print contact titles.

4.5 Building the Address Book Word Search Table


This section provides an overview of word search and describe how to:
Run the Word Search Build program.
Set processing options for Word Search Build (R01BDWRD).
Use Address Book word search.

4.5.1 Understanding Word Search

4-24 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Building the Address Book Word Search Table

After you build the AB Word Search Master table (F01815), you can search for address
book records using the Word Search program (P01BDWRD). With an established
F01815 table, you can search on address book records and who's who information by
using text strings such as name, city, state, or postal code.
The address book search capability is especially useful if you are using another JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne system and want to obtain an address book number by
searching on certain fields in the address book record. For example, if you want to
obtain an address book number for Capital, you can enter C, the entire word, or a
portion of the word followed by the wildcard, as in Cap*.

4.5.2 Form Used for Word Search

Form Name FormID Navigation Usage


A/B Word Search W01BDWRDA Daily Processing Search for address
(G0110), Word Search book and who's who
information using text
strings.

4.5.3 Running the Word Search Build Program


Select A/B Advanced & Technical Operations (G0131), Word Search Build.

4.5.4 Setting Processing Options for Word Search Build (R01BDWRD)


Processing options enable you to specify the default processing for programs and
reports.

4.5.4.1 Process
1. Category Codes
Specify whether the program includes address book category codes 130 when it
builds the F01815 table for searchable items. Values are:
Blank: No, the program does not include address book category codes 130.
1: Yes, the program includes address book category codes 130.

2. Who's Who and Phones


Specify whether the program includes who's who and phone information when it
builds the F01815 table for searchable items. Values are:
Blank: No, the program does not include who's who and phone information.
1: Yes, the program includes who's who and phone information.

3. Parent/Child
Specify whether the program includes parent/child information when it builds the
F01815 table for searchable items. Values are:
Blank: No, the program does not include parent/child information.
1: Yes, the program includes parent/child information.

4.5.5 Using Address Book Word Search


Access the A/B Word Search form.

Entering Address Book Records 4-25


Building the Address Book Word Search Table

Search Word
Enter one or more words to use for a search. If you are using a string of full words, the
word string must be in the exact order as what you want to find. Alternatively, you
can use a wildcard with a partial string.

Display Who's Who Information


Select this option to view who's who information.

4-26 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


5
Using Foundation Calendar
5

This chapter contains the following topics:


Section 5.1, "Understanding Foundation Calendar"
Section 5.2, "Understanding the Setup Requirements for Foundation Calendar"
Section 5.3, "Managing Calendars"
Section 5.4, "Managing Activities"
Section 5.5, "Creating Action Plans"

5.1 Understanding Foundation Calendar


Foundation Calendar applications enable you to create calendars for various entities,
such as employees, sales representatives, partners, customers, and resources. You can
create activities, which can be events or tasks, and add them to calendars. Events can
include items such as meetings and scheduled phone calls to customers. Tasks can
include items such as preparing for a meeting or researching potential customers.
Events can be assigned to multiple calendars. For example, you can assign a meeting
to multiple employees.
Foundation Calendar uses universal time, so users in different locations will always be
able to view the calendar in their local time zone.

5.1.1 Integrating with Other Systems


The Foundation Calendar and activities programs integrate closely with these JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne product families:
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Customer Relationship Management (CRM).
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Human Capital Management (HCM).
When integrating with the CRM products, you can use the calendar and activities
programs to manage the work load of your sales force, schedule meetings with
customers, partners, and contacts, and schedule tasks and events that are associated
with sales leads and opportunities. You can also use the calendar and activity
programs to manage the work load of customer service representatives and to
schedule tasks and events that are associated with cases.
When integrating with the HCM products, you can use the calendar and activities
programs to manage work, holiday, and vacation schedules for the workforce. You can
create calendars to record work schedules for a company, business unit, state or
province, union, or location. You can also create calendars for individual employees,
which you can use to track personal leave time such as sick or vacation.

Using Foundation Calendar 5-1


Understanding the Setup Requirements for Foundation Calendar

5.2 Understanding the Setup Requirements for Foundation Calendar


Before you can use Foundation Calendar, you must verify that your system is set up
correctly and that the user-defined code (UDC) tables that the system uses contain the
appropriate values. This table describes the required setup for Foundation Calendar:

Setup Task Description


Set up UDCs. These UDCs are required for foundation
calendar processing:
01/CY
01/TM
01/AC
01/PL
01/AD
01/AE
01/AF
01/AG
01/AH
01/C1
01/C2
01/C3
01/C4
01/C5
01/DV
01/PT
01/IT
01/LT
01/WD
01/DY
01/WK
01/MN
01/CG
01/TL
Set up CRM Constants If you are using Foundation Calendar for
CRM purposes, you must set the CRM
constant for Foundation Calendar. This
constant enables you to specify the default
calendar type so that when you access a
calendar from the CRM programs, the system
automatically displays the specified calendar
type.

This table describes the UDC tables that you use to manage calendars:

5-2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Understanding the Setup Requirements for Foundation Calendar

UDC Table Description


01/CY This UDC table defines valid types of calendars. The
system uses the special handling code value from this
table to determine which program to use when opening
the calendar. You can specify P01301 or P01302 in the
Special Handling column of the table. If you leave the
Special Handling field blank, the system uses P01301 to
open activities for that calendar type. Create values that
meet your business needs or use these existing values:
Bank
Carrier
CRM
Customer
Holiday
Personal
Resource
Route
Supplier
WRKEXC (Employee Work Schedule)
01/TM This UDC table defines valid start and end times for the
work day. Either use the one-hour increments that are
provided or create your own times with thirty-minute
increments. Enter the values in this format: hh:mm,
where hh represents the hour and mm represents the
minutes. You must use two digits to enter the hours. For
example, enter 08:30 to represent 8:30 a.m.
01/AC This UDC table defines valid activity types. Enter 1 in
the Special Handling field for each type that is a task to
differentiate between tasks and events. Tasks are not
time sensitive; therefore, the system will not allow a user
to enter a start time or an end time for tasks. The system
displays only events on the calendar. You can use the
activity types provided or create your own.
01/PL This UDC table defines plan types for creating a set of
activities from action plans. Either use the plan types
that are provided or create your own types.
01/AD, 01/AE, 01/AF, 01/AG, You can set up these UDC tables to create category codes
01/AH to further classify your calendars.
01/C1, 01/C2, 01/C3, 01/C4, You can set up these UDC tables to create category codes
01/C5 to further classify your activities and tasks.
01/DV This table defines the default view for a calendar. Values
are:
D: Day
W: Week
M: Month
The values in this table are hard-coded and should not
be changed.

Using Foundation Calendar 5-3


Understanding the Setup Requirements for Foundation Calendar

UDC Table Description


01/PT This UDC table defines the valid priority and
commitment levels for activities. Values are:
1: Low Priority
2: Medium Priority
3: High Priority
The values in this table are hard-coded and should not
be changed.
01/IT This UDC table defines the types of entities for which
calendars can be created within the Foundation
Calendar system. Values are:
ADDS: State/Province
AN8: Address Book Number
CO: Company
MCU: Branch Plant
UN: Union
WRKSCH: Work Schedule
The values in this table are hard-coded and should not
be changed.
01/LT This UDC table defines valid lead-time units for activity
and task reminder messages. Values are:
D: Days
H: Hours
M: Minutes
The values in this table are hard-coded and should not
be changed.
01/WD This UDC table defines valid start and end days for the
work week. Values are:
1: Sunday
2: Monday
3: Tuesday
4: Wednesday
5: Thursday
6: Friday
7: Saturday
The values in this table are hard-coded and should not
be changed.
01/MD This UDC table defines valid meridiem values. Values
are AM and PM.
The values in this table are hard-coded and should not
be changed.

5-4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Managing Calendars

UDC Table Description


01/DY This UDC table defines days of the week for recurrence
patterns for activities and tasks. Values are:
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
The values in this table are hard-coded and should not
be changed.
01/WK This UDC table defines the weeks of the month for
recurrence patterns for activities and tasks. Values are:
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Last
The values in this table are hard-coded and should not
be changed.
01/MN This UDC table defines the months of the year for
recurrence patterns for activities and tasks. Values are:
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
The values in this table are hard-coded and should not
be changed.

5.3 Managing Calendars


This section provides an overview of calendars and discusses how to:
Set processing options for Calendar Maintenance (P01311).
Add calendars.
Associate calendars.

Using Foundation Calendar 5-5


Managing Calendars

5.3.1 Understanding Calendars


You use the Calendar Maintenance program (P01311) to create and maintain calendars
for various entities, such as employees, customers, suppliers, and resources. When
creating a calendar, you can specify information such as the visible views, the default
view, the start and end time of the work day, and the start and end day of the work
week.
You also define the identifier type and the identifier. The system uses this information
to determine the entity with which the calendar is associated. For example, if you
create a calendar for a specific customer, you enter AN8 (address book number) in the
Identifier Type field and then enter the address book number for that customer in the
Identifier field.
You can also assign category codes to calendars. Each category code is attached to a
UDC table, to which you can add multiple values to further classify calendars.
Category codes enable you to use data that is specific to your organization when
creating and managing calendars.

5.3.1.1 Associating Calendars


You can associate an entity with multiple calendars by linking the calendars together
for a specified time period. The system uses data from all of the calendars that are
associated with an entity when it displays the complete calendar for that entity. You
use the Calendar Associations program (P01315) to associate calendars. The system
stores associated calendar information in the Calendar Association table (F01315).

Note: Though you can associate calendars of any type, currently,


associated calendar data can be viewed only in the HCM system using
the Employee Schedules program (P07311). Therefore, if you associate
several CRM calendars, no program is currently available that
displays the combined information for those calendars.

See "Administering Global Leave" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Time


and Labor Implemenation Guide.
For example, if you use calendars to facilitate resource scheduling for employees, you
might link these calendars to an employee to view the entire schedule for the
individual employee:
Shift calendar
Use this calendar to define the schedule and record activities that affect all of the
employees who work in a shift.
Company holiday calendar
Use this calendar to schedule holidays that pertain to all of the employees in the
company.
Individual employee calendar
Use this calendar to record and schedule events that pertain to only an individual
employee. For example, you might enter vacation time that the employee is taking
on this calendar.
In this example, when you view the employee's calendar, the system displays the
activities and tasks from all three of these calendars to provide you with a complete
view of the employee's schedule. Therefore, when you view the employee's calendar,
you see all of the events, tasks, and schedule information that is contained on the shift

5-6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Managing Calendars

calendar, the company holiday calendar, and the individual employee calendar. The
employee's calendar for the week might include a meeting for all employees who
work that shift, a company holiday for all employees in the company, and a day of
vacation time that the employee has scheduled.
You must link the employee to each calendar with which the employee is associated.
For example, if you want to view company holidays, shift calendars, and personal
information for an employee, you must link the individual employee to each of those
calendars.

5.3.2 Forms Used to Manage Calendars

Form Name FormID Navigation Usage


Search for Calendar W01311A Foundation Calendar Locate existing
(G01A), Calendar calendars.
Maintenance
Calendar W01311D Click Add on the Add a calendar or
Search for Calendar review and revise an
form. existing one.
Edit Calendar W01315C On the Search for Associate calendars.
Associations Calendar form, select
a calendar for which
you want to review,
add, or update
associations, and click
the Calendar
Associations button.

5.3.3 Setting Processing Options for Calendar Maintenance (P01311)


These processing options provide default information for creating calendars.

5.3.3.1 Defaults
1. Enter the Calendar Type to default on the Calendar View. Only used when Calendar
View is launched directly.
Specify the default calendar type to display when the Calendar View application is
launched directly from the menu.

2. Activity Type for Add


Specify the default activity type to use when entering an activity. Values are stored in
UDC 01/AC.

5.3.3.2 Process
1. User Type
Specify the type of user who is accessing a calendar. The system uses this processing
option to determine the configuration of the Activity program. Values are:
CRM: Configure for CRM users.
FIN or Blank: Configure for other users.

Using Foundation Calendar 5-7


Managing Calendars

5.3.3.3 Version
1. Common Processing Option (P01350)
Specify the version of the Common Processing Option program (P01350) for the
system to use when accessing a calendar. If you leave this processing option blank, the
system uses version ZJDE0001.

5.3.4 Adding Calendars


Access the Calendar form.

Figure 51 Calendar form

Calendar Name
Enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters.

Calendar Type
Select a valid calendar type. The system stores valid calendar types in UDC 01/CY.

Identifier ID Type
Select a valid identifier type. The system stores identifier types in UDC 01/IT. These
values are hard-coded and include:
Address Number
Company
Branch/Plant
Union
State/Province

5-8 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Managing Calendars

Identifier
Enter a valid identifier, based on the value that you selected in the Identifier ID Type
field. If you selected Address Number, you must enter a valid address book number. If
you selected Branch Plant, you must enter a valid business unit or branch/plant.
If you do not know the address book number, you can enter the name of the address
book record, and the system supplies the address book number for you. For example,
you can enter Global Enterprises and the system populates the Identifier field with
the address book number for Global Enterprises.
If you enter a name that has multiple entries in the address book, the system displays
the Address Book Long Number Search form, from which you can select the correct
address book record.

Day
Select to view the daily format of the calendar.

Week
Select to view the weekly format of the calendar.

Month
Select to view the monthly format of the calendar.

Default View Mode


Select the default view for the calendar. The system stores valid default views in UDC
01/DV.

Work Day Start


Select the start time for the work day. The system stores valid start times in UDC
01/TM.

Work Day End


Select the end time for the work day. The system stores valid end times in UDC
01/TM.

Work Week Start


Select the start day for the work week. The system stores start days in UDC 01/WD.
These values are hard-coded.

Work Week End


Select the end day for the work week. The system stores valid end days in UDC
01/WD.

Calendar Category Code 1 through Calendar Category Code 5


Select valid category code values from UDCs 01/C1, 01/C2, 01/C3, 01/C4, and 01/C5.

5.3.5 Associating Calendars


Access the Edit Calendar Associations form.
1. Click the search button for the Associated Calendar Type field.
2. On the Search for Calendar form, locate the calendar that you want to link to the
main calendar, and then click Select.
3. On Edit Calendar Associations, complete these fields to specify the time period
during which the calendars are linked:
Effective Date

Using Foundation Calendar 5-9


Managing Activities

Expiration Date
4. Complete steps 1 through 3 until you are finished linking calendars, and then click
Save.

5.4 Managing Activities


This section provides an overview of activities and discusses how to:
Set processing options for Activity View (P01301).
Set processing options for Search Activities (P01300).
Set processing options for Activity Common Processing Options (P01350).
Set processing options for Manage Basic Activities (P01302).
Set processing options for Activity Homepage (P01312).
Create an activity.
Enter recurrence information for an activity.
Manage assignees for an activity.
Add tasks using quick add.
Search for activities.
View activities for another user.
Update the status of an activity.

5.4.1 Understanding Activities


You create activities to manage your daily business operations. You can create two
types of activities:
Events
Tasks
You create an event to record items such as meetings, phone calls to customers, and
appointments. The system displays events on a calendar. You create tasks to record
items that are not time-sensitive, such as research and preparation for meetings. The
system does not display tasks on a calendar. Although you use the Activity View
program (P01301) to enter both events and tasks, the system processes events and
tasks differently. The system distinguishes between events and tasks by reviewing the
Special Handling field in the UDC table for activities, 01/AC. Tasks are items in UDC
01/AC that have a value of 1 in the Special Handling field.
To create an event, you enter information such as a start and end date, a start and end
time, an activity and type, and a priority. After you create an event, it appears on the
calendar that you specify. To create a task, you enter much of the same information as
you enter for events, with the exception that you do not enter a start and end time for
tasks. In addition, tasks do not appear on calendar views. Tasks appear only on the
Search for Activities form or the Task section of the Activity Homepage form.

5.4.1.1 Assignees
You can assign other entities to an activity that you create. For example, you can invite
others to a meeting. If you assign events or tasks to other entities, the events appear on
the calendar of the entity that you specify, and the tasks appear in their task list. When

5-10 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Managing Activities

you enter an assignment for an event, the system creates a calendar for any entity that
does not already have one.
When you are updating an activity that is assigned to other participants, the following
rules apply:
If you change or delete the owner's event record, the system updates the calendars
of all other participants accordingly.
If you change or delete an assignee's activity record, the changes affect only that
assignee's record. The system does not update the records of the activity owner or
that of any other assignee.
Each assignee can mark an activity as completed. However, after all assignees
have marked the activity complete, the system does not automatically mark the
master activity as complete. The owner of the activity must specify that the
activity is complete.

5.4.1.2 Associations
You can enter associations for tasks and calendar events. Associations represent the
entity and corresponding contact person for which the activity is created. You can
associate an activity with any of the following entities, and specify a contact for that
entity:
Address Book record
Customer
Partner
Lead
Opportunity
Case

Note: The Partner, Lead, Opportunity, and Case fields are displayed
only if the system is set to CRM mode.
If you enter associations that are related to CRM applications, then
after you save the activity record, you can view that activity from the
corresponding entity record. For example, if you associate an activity
with a customer, you can view all of the activities for that customer
when you inquire on the customer record.

See "Managing Sales Leads" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Customer


Relationship Management for Sales Implementation Guide, "Managing Sales Opportunities"
in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Customer Relationship Management for Sales
Implementation Guide, and "Managing Customer Information" in the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Applications Customer Relationship Management Fundamentals
Implemenation Guide, and "Managing Partners" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Applications Customer Relationship Management Fundamentals Implemenation Guide, and
"Managing Contacts" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Customer Relationship
Management Fundamentals Implemenation Guide.

5.4.1.3 Recurring Activities


You can set up both events and tasks to be recurring entries. You can specify how often
an entry should recur and when the recurrence pattern should end. When you search

Using Foundation Calendar 5-11


Managing Activities

for events or tasks, the system lists each instance of the recurring activity that meets
the search criteria. For example, if you set up a task that recurs each day for a week,
and you search for all tasks for the week, the system displays a task record for each
day on which the task occurs.
The system enables owners and assignees to make changes to individual instances of a
recurring task or event. The system also maintains those changes if the master task or
event is changed. This functionality minimizes loss of data for assignees who might
track important information in an activity record. When the master record is changed,
those changes are sent to each assignee's record. Only the changed fields are updated.
However, if an assignee changes information on an activity record, and the owner then
changes the same field on the master record, the system overwrites the assignee's
change with the updated information from the master record.
The system also enables assignees to delete specific instances of a recurring task or
event. For example, an assignee might be able to attend a weekly meeting during all
instances but one, when he is on vacation. The system enables the assignee to delete
the instance that occurs while he is on vacation and maintain all other instances.
For recurring activities that have been assigned to other assignees, several rules apply
when you update or delete instances of the activity. This table describes how the
system processes changes that are made to owner records and assignee records,
whether those changes are made to a single instance or all instances of a recurring
activity:

Is the change
made to the owner Are you changing a
record or an single instance or
assignee record? all instances? Processing Information
The owner record All instances of the When the user of an activity makes changes to the
of the activity. activity. master record, which affects all instances of the
activity, the system:
Enables the user to change all activity details
that are shown on the Detail, Category, and
Advanced tabs with the exception of call plan
if one is assigned.
Does not allow the user to change the start
date for the activity, because this information
is part of the recurrence pattern.
Enables the user to change the end date of the
recurrence pattern or the number of
occurrences.
Enables the user to delete or add new
assignees.
Enables the user to delete the master record,
in which case all assignee records are also
deleted.

5-12 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Managing Activities

Is the change
made to the owner Are you changing a
record or an single instance or
assignee record? all instances? Processing Information
The owner record A single instance of When the user of an activity makes changes to a
of the activity. the activity. single instance of an activity, the system:
Creates an anomaly record to record the
changes. The system updates these changes
for that instance for all assignees.
Does not allow the user to change:
The start date of
the single instance.
Recurrence
attributes for the
single instance,
such as the end
date or number of
recurrences.
The owner of the
activity.
Enables the user to delete or add new
assignees to the instance.
Records only the changes that are made to
the instance, and propagates those changes to
the corresponding assignee records for that
instance.
Enables the user to delete the single instance,
in which case the system deletes assignees'
instances also and creates an exclusion record
for that instance.

Using Foundation Calendar 5-13


Managing Activities

Is the change
made to the owner Are you changing a
record or an single instance or
assignee record? all instances? Processing Information
An assignee record. All instances of the When a user makes changes to the assignee record
activity. that affects all instances of the activity for that
assignee only, the system:
Does not allow the user to change:
Start date or start
time.
End date or end
time.
Activity type.
Customer or
customer contact.
Partner or partner
contact.
Lead, opportunity,
or case.
Recurrence
attributes, such as
the number of
recurrences.
Enables the user to add a new assignee to the
activity. The system generates all occurrences
of the activity for the new assignee.
Enables the user to delete assignees from the
activity, with the exception of the owner of
the activity.
Records the changes that are made and
propagates those changes to all instances for
the assignee only. The system does not update
the records for the owner or for other
assignees.
Enables the user to delete the activity. The
system deletes all instances of the activity
from the assignee only, but does not delete
the owner's or other assignees' records.

5-14 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Managing Activities

Is the change
made to the owner Are you changing a
record or an single instance or
assignee record? all instances? Processing Information
An assignee record. A single instance of When a user makes changes to an assignee record
the activity. of a single instance of the activity, the system:
Creates an anomaly record to record the
changes. The system updates these changes
for the assignee only.
Enables the user to change the start and end
time.
Does not allow the assignee to change the
start or end date, customers, contacts,
partners, leads, opportunities, or cases.
Does not allow the assignee to change
recurrence information, such as the number
of occurrences.
Enables the user to add new assignees to this
instance. The system sends a clone of this
changed instance to the new assignees.
Enables the user to delete assignees from the
instance, with the exception of the owner.
Enables the user to delete that instance. The
system deletes only the single instance for
that assignee.

This table describes the tables that store recurring entry information:

Table Description
Activity Master (F01301) Stores information for all events and tasks,
such as:
Identifier ID and type
Calendar type
Activity type
Subject
Location
Start and end time
Start and end date
Recurrence ID (for recurring entries only)
Recurrence Master (F01321) Stores information for recurring events and
tasks, such as:
Recurrence ID (copied from the F01301
table).
Recurring frequency.
Start and end date.
Day of the week on which the entry
recurs.
Week of the month in which the entry
recurs.

Using Foundation Calendar 5-15


Managing Activities

Table Description
Recurrence Exclusion (F01331) Stores information for exclusions for recurring
events and tasks, such as:
Recurrence exclusion ID.
Recurrence ID (copied from the F01301
table).
Exclusion date.
Mobile Client Deleted Activities (F01301W) Temporarily stores activities that were deleted
in disconnected mode. The table is reset when
the mobile client is synchronized with the
Enterprise server.

5.4.1.4 Reminders
You can specify that you want the system to remind you of an event. When you select
the Remind option, the system displays fields for you to specify the time and
corresponding time unit for the system to use when determining when to send the
reminder. If the event is assigned to multiple assignees, assignees can enter their own
reminder settings by updating their own activity records. If assignees do not update
their activity records, the system uses the reminder settings on the main activity
record.
You can also alert all assignees of an upcoming activity when you click the Notify
Assignees Now button. When you click this button, the system immediately notifies
all assignees that the event is due. For example, you can notify all meeting attendees of
an upcoming meeting. Depending on how the electronic address information is
defined for the address book record, the system notifies assignees using the work
center or E-mail.
The message template that the system uses to notify assignees includes:
Address book 1.
Address book 1 contact.
Address book 1 contact phone.
Address book 2.
Address book 2 contact.
Address book 2 contact phone.
Activity description.
Activity type.
Start and end time.
Start and end day.
To send reminders and alerts, the system uses workflow process K0130040.
See JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Workflow Tools Guide.
See Delivered Workflow for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book.

5.4.1.5 Activity Homepage


You can use the activity homepage to manage all of the events and tasks for a specified
entity. The activity homepage provides you with a calendar view of all scheduled
events and a list of all tasks that are scheduled for the corresponding time period. You

5-16 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Managing Activities

can change the time period for tasks and calendar events separately on the activity
homepage. For example, you can display the calendar events for the current work
week and display a list of the tasks that are scheduled for the current day.
The Activity Homepage program (P01312) enables you to:
View your own calendar and view the calendar of other users or entities.
You can view the calendar by day, week, or month.
View overdue tasks.
Use the quick add function to add tasks.
Add events to a calendar.
Delete tasks or events.
Mark a task as completed.
When you access the Activity Homepage form, the system displays the default
calendar type for the signed-in user, which you set in the processing options. To
change the calendar type that the system displays, you can enter a different calendar
type in the View Activities For portion of the form and click Find. You can also use this
portion of the form to view calendar information for another user.
You can also use the Activity Homepage form to quickly review, update, and add
events to a calendar, or add tasks to a user. The bottom portion of the form displays
tasks that meet the search criteria of the selected query. Available queries include:
All tasks.
All tasks due in the last 7 days.
All tasks due in the next 7 days.
All tasks due today, both open and closed.
All open tasks.
All overdue tasks and tasks due today.
The system also displays in red in the header of the task portion of the form the
number of tasks that are overdue. From this form you can select the task and update
the status or the due date if necessary. You can also use the quick task add function to
add a task to a user. The quick task add function enables you to quickly create a task
by completing only these fields:
Subject
Address Book (Optional)
Task Type
End Date
Finally, you can use the Activity Homepage form to add events to your calendar or to
the calendars of other users. You can also create tasks for yourself or other users. The
ability to add activities from the homepage enables you to review your calendar and
schedule the task or event accordingly.

Using Foundation Calendar 5-17


Managing Activities

Note: If you add an event to another user's CRM calendar, or you


create a task for another CRM user, the system adds the activity to
your calendar or task list and to the other user's calendar or task list,
but lists you as an assignee and lists the other user as the owner. If you
are not in CRM mode, the system adds the activity only to the other
user, and does not add you as an assignee.

5.4.1.6 Basic and Advanced Activity Search


When searching for activities, you can use these methods:
Basic search
Advanced search
The basic search functionality enables you to find tasks and events using basic search
criteria, such as:
Subject
Activity type
Owner type
Owner
End Date
Address book
Occasionally, you need to use more detailed search criteria to find activities. Using the
advanced search function, you can search for activities using these additional search
criteria:
Calendar type
Activity status
Priority
Start date
Identifier type
Identifier
Associations
You can also use the advanced search to find only activities that have recurrence
information or to find all of the assignee records that are associated with the master
record of an activity. You use the All Assignees option to find all assignee records that
are associated with a master record, but you must verify that the Identifier field is clear
before you select the option.
Whether using the basic or advanced search, you can use saved queries to search for
activities. For example, if you frequently search for Priority 3 tasks for a particular
user, you can create and save a query to search for activities that meet that criteria.
After you enter the criteria that you want to use to search, you then click the Save
Queries link to name the query. After you have named the query, it appears in the list
of available choices in the Select a Query field. You then select the query and click Find
to search for activities that meet the specified criteria.

5-18 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Managing Activities

5.4.2 Forms Used to Manage Activities

Form Name FormID Navigation Usage


Search for Activities W01300A Foundation Calendar Search for events and
(G01A), Activity View tasks.
Add Activity W01301D Click Add Activity on Access the Add
the Search for Activity form to:
Activities form.
Add activities.
Enter assignees
and associations
for activities.
Enter recurrence
information for
activities.
Include
attachments for
activities.
Edit Activity W01301D From the Search for Review or update an
Activities form, select existing activity, enter
the activity. recurrence
information, or
manage assignees.
Activity Homepage W01312A Foundation Calendar Use the activity
(G01A), Activity homepage to:
Homepage
View calendar
events and tasks,
including those
that are overdue,
for a specified
entity.
Add an event to a
calendar.
Use the quick add
function to create
a task.
Mark tasks and
events as
completed.
Delete tasks or
events from a
calendar.

5.4.3 Setting Processing Options for Activity View (P01301)


These processing options specify default values for the system to use when processing
events and tasks.

5.4.3.1 Display
1. Display Identifier Type on Form
Specify whether to display the Identifier Type field on the Add Activity form. Values
are:
Blank: Do not display the field.
1: Display the field.

Using Foundation Calendar 5-19


Managing Activities

2. Display Identifier Type in Assignment Grid


Specify whether to display the Identifier Type field on the Add Activity Assignment
subform. Values are:
Blank: Do not display the field.
1: Display the field.

3. Display Calendar Type in Assignment Grid


Specify whether the system displays the Calendar Type field on the Add Activity
form. Values are:
Blank: Do not display the field.
1: Display the field.

5.4.3.2 Default
1. Use current system date for start date and time.
Use this processing option to specify whether the system uses today's date and time as
the starting date and time for an event. Values are:
Blank: The system does not use today's date and time.
1: The system uses today's date and time when creating an event.

2. Phone number Type to be used with Notify Assignments


Use this processing option to specify the default phone number type to use with alarm
assignment. The system uses the phone to publish messages to the Work Center. If you
leave this processing option blank, no phone type is entered.

5.4.3.3 Process
1. Enter UDC for Assignee Search
In the first blank field of this processing option, enter the system code of the UDC
table, such as 01. In the second blank field of this processing option, enter the table
code, such as SA. If you leave either of these fields blank, the system uses UDC 01/SA.

2. Automatically notify Assignees when Activity is added or changed


Specify whether to automatically notify assignees when an activity is added or
changed. Values are:
Blank: Do not automatically notify.
1: Notify.

5.4.4 Setting Processing Options for Search Activities (P01300)


Use these processing options to specify the default versions that the system uses when
processing activity information.

Note: If you access the activities program from the Activity


Homepage program, the options that you specify here will override
the options that you specify in the Activity Homepage program.
However, if you leave any of these processing options blank, and
specify default information in the Activity Homepage program, the
system uses the information from the processing options of the
Activity Homepage program.

5-20 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Managing Activities

5.4.4.1 Basic Defaults


1. Activity Type
Specify the default activity type that the system uses when you create a new activity.
Typically, you enter the type of event or task that is most used by your organization.
When you create a new event or task, the system automatically populates the Activity
Type field with the value that you enter in this processing option. You can override
this value when you create an activity.

2. Owner ID
Specify how the system populates the Owner ID field when you create a new activity.
If you leave this processing option blank, the system does not populate the field, and
you must manually specify the owner of the activity. If you enter 1, the system
populates the field with the user ID of the person who enters the activity. You can
override this value if necessary.

5.4.4.2 Advanced Defaults


1. Calendar Type for Search
Specify the default calendar type to use when searching for an activity. For example, if
you typically search for personal calendars more than any other type of calendar, enter
PERSONAL in this field. Values for this field are stored in UDC 01/CY.

2. Completed Activity
Specify the default for activity status on the advanced tab. If you enter 1, the system
displays only completed activities. If you enter 0, the system displays only open
activities. If you leave this processing option blank, the system displays all activities.

3. Priority
Specify the default priority code to use when searching for activities. If you leave this
processing option blank, the system searches all activities, regardless of priority. Values
are:
1: Low
2: Medium
3: High

4. Identifier
Specify whether the system populates the Identifier field on the Advanced tab with the
user's ID when you are searching for activities. If you leave this processing option
blank, the system does not populate the Identifier field. Enter 1 to populate the field
with the user's ID.

5.4.4.3 Process
You use these processing options to specify default information that the system uses
when processing activity information.

Note: If you access this program from the Activity Homepage, the
system uses the default information from the processing options of the
Activity Homepage program. The system disregards the default
information that you set up in these processing options unless the
processing options of the Activity Homepage program are blank.

Using Foundation Calendar 5-21


Managing Activities

1. Enter User Type


Enter CRM if the users are CRM users, or leave blank for other users.

2. Calendar Type for Add Activity


Specify the default calendar type with which an activity is associated when you create
an activity. For example, enter PERSONAL if you typically add activities to a personal
calendar. You can override this value when adding an activity.

3. Activity Type for Add Activity


Specify the default activity type to use when you create an activity. Values are stored in
UDC 01/AC.

5.4.4.4 Versions
1. Common Process Options (P01350) Version
Specify the version of the Activity Common Processing Options program (P01350) to
use when searching for or adding activities. If you leave this processing option blank,
the system uses version ZJDE0001.

5.4.5 Setting Processing Options for Activity Common Processing Options (P01350)
Use these processing options to specify the default versions that the system uses when
processing activity information.

5.4.5.1 Versions
Enter the version of each program on this tab. If you leave any of these processing
options blank, with the exception of the Partner program processing option, the
system uses version ZJDE0001. The default version of the Partner program is
ZJDE0009. You can specify versions of these programs:
Activity (P01301)
Basic Activity (P01302)
Manage Leads (P90CB010)
Manage Opportunities (P90CB020)
Manage Case (P90CG501)
CRM Customer Master (P90CA080)
CRM Customer Contact (P90CA08T)
Partner (P01012)

Note: If you leave this processing option blank, the system uses
version ZJDE0009.

Partner Search and Select (P90CA050)


Address Book 1 (non CRM) (P01012)
Address Book 2 (non CRM) (P01012)

5.4.6 Setting Processing Options for Manage Basic Activities (P01302)


Use these processing options to specify default information about how the system
processes basic activities.

5-22 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Managing Activities

5.4.6.1 Display
1. Display Identifier Type on Form
Specify whether to display the Identifier Type field on the Edit Activity form. Values
are:
Blank: Do not display
1: Display

2. Display Calendar Type on Form


Specify whether to display the Calendar Type field on the Edit Activity form. Values
are:
Blank: Do not display
1: Display

3. Display Activity Type on Form


Specify whether to display the Activity Type field on the Edit Activity form. Values
are:
Blank: Do not display
1: Display

5.4.6.2 Default
1. Use current system date for start date and time.
Specify whether to populate the start and end date fields with the current system date.
Values are:
Blank: Do not populate
1: Populate

5.4.7 Setting Processing Options for Activity Homepage (P01312)


Use these processing options to set up default information about how the system
processes activity information.

5.4.7.1 Versions
1. Common Processing Options (P01350) Version.
Specify the version of the Activities Common Processing Options program that you
want to use when accessing information from the Activity Homepage program. If you
leave this processing option blank, the system uses version ZJDE0001.

2. Search Activities (P01300) Version.


Specify the version of the Search Activities program that you want to use when
accessing information from the Activity Homepage program. If you leave this
processing option blank, the system uses version ZJDE0001.

5.4.7.2 Defaults
1. Default Calendar Type
Use this processing option to specify the calendar type to display when you launch the
Foundation Calendar application directly from the menu. For example, you might use
a default value of PERSONAL. Therefore, when you launch the Foundation Calendar

Using Foundation Calendar 5-23


Managing Activities

application directly from the menu, the system displays the personal calendar for the
signed-in user. However, if you access the calendar from a CRM program, such as the
Opportunity application, the system uses values that are set up in the CRM system to
determine which calendar type to display. Values are stored in UDC 01/CY.

2. Default Activity Type for Adding Events


Use this processing option to specify the default activity type to use when you add
events on the calendar. Typically, you enter the most common type of event that you
create. For example, if your organization frequently schedules calls to customers, you
might enter CALL in this processing option. You can override this value when you
create your event if necessary. Values are stored in UDC 01/AC.

3. Default Activity Type for Adding Tasks


Use this processing option to specify the default activity type to use when you create
tasks. Typically, you enter the most common type of task that you create. For example,
if your organization uses the calendar functions to set reminders for items that they
must complete, you might enter TODO in this processing option to specify a to-do
task. You can override this value when you create your task if necessary. Values are
stored in UDC 01/AC.

5.4.7.3 Process
1. User Type
Use this processing option to specify the type of user that typically accesses the
calendar. The system uses this processing option to determine how to display
information on the Activity Homepage. Values are:
CRM: CRM User
Blank: Non-CRM User

5.4.8 Creating an Activity


Access the Add Activity form.
Alternatively, access the Activity Homepage form, and then click the Add Activity
button, or double-click in the calendar grid to access the Add Activity form.

5.4.8.1 Details
Select the Details tab.

Subject
Enter a description for the activity. You can enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
This is a required field.

Activity Type
Enter a type for the activity. You set up valid activity types in UDC 01/AC. This is a
required field.

Start Date
Enter a start date for the activity.

End Date
Enter an end date for the activity. This is a required field.

5-24 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Managing Activities

Location
Enter a location for the activity. For example, enter a conference room number for a
meeting.

Start Time
Enter a start time and select A.M. or P.M. Entering time with 24-hour format is also
recognized by the system. For example, entering 14:30 is accepted and, upon inquiry,
the system reformats the value to 2:00 P.M. This field is not required for tasks or for
all-day activities.

End Time
Enter an end time for the activity and select A.M. or P.M. The system recognizes the
24-hour time format. This field is not required for tasks or for all-day activities.

All Day
Select to indicate that the activity lasts the entire day.

Priority Level
Enter a priority level for the activity. The system stores priority levels, which are
hard-coded, in UDC 01/PT. Values are:
1: Low priority
2: Medium priority
3: High priority

Address Book 1 or Customer


Enter the address book number of the entity for which the activity applies. If you leave
the Enter Display Configuration for Activity Application processing option blank, the
system displays Address Book 1 for the description for this field, and the address book
number that you enter must exist in the Address Book Master table (F0101). If you
enter CRM in the processing option, the system displays Customer, and the number
that you enter must exist in the Customer table (F90CA080).

Contact 1 or Customer Contact


Enter the who's who number of the contact for which the activity applies. You must
enter a valid contact number for the address book number that is specified in the
Address Book 1/Customer field. Who's who number zero is not considered a contact.
If you leave the Enter Display Configuration for Activity Application processing
option blank, the system displays Contact 1 for the description for this field. If you
enter CRM in the processing option, the system displays Customer Contact.

Address Book 2 or Partner


Enter the address book number of an additional entity for which the activity applies. If
you leave the Enter Display Configuration for Activity Application processing option
blank, the system displays Address Book 2 for the description for this field. If you
enter CRM in the processing option, the system displays Partner, and the number that
you enter must exist in the Partner table (F90CA050).

Contact 2 or Partner Contact


Enter the who's who number of the contact for which the activity applies. The system
does not recognize who's who record number 0 as a contact. You must enter a valid
contact number for the address book number that is specified in the Address Book
2/Partner field. If you leave the Enter Display Configuration for Activity Application
processing option blank, the system displays Contact 2 for the description for this
field. If you enter CRM in the processing option, the system displays Partner Contact.

Using Foundation Calendar 5-25


Managing Activities

Completed
Select to indicate that you have completed the activity.

Remind
Select to send reminders for the activity. Then, complete the related fields to specify
when the system should send the reminder.

Description
Enter additional text to describe the activity. You can enter up to 1,999 characters.

5.4.8.2 Attachments
Select the Attachments tab.
Use this form to add text, URLs, files, and other types of attachments to the activity.

5.4.8.3 Settings
Select the Settings tab.

Identifier Type
Specify the identifier type for the activity.

Calendar Type
Specify the calendar type to which the activity is added.

Identifier
Specify the identifier. The system uses this value, along with the values in the
Identifier Type and Calendar Type fields, to determine the calendar to which the
activity belongs. For example, to add an activity to the personal calendar of an
employee, you enter Address Book in the Identifier Type field, enter Personal in the
Calendar Type field, and specify the employee's address book number in this field.

Display Activity on Calendar


Select to display the activity on the calendar. The system displays only events on
calendars. If you select this option, the activity is visible in the calendar views.

5.4.8.4 Category Codes


Select the Category Codes tab.

Category Code 1through Category Code 5


Enter a valid category code from UDCs 01/AD, 01/AE, 01/AF, 01AG, and 01/AH.
You can use category codes to further define the information in the activity record.
Category codes are user-configured and can store information that meets your
business needs.

5.4.8.5 Recurrence and Assignee Information


Proceed to the next tasks in this section for additional information about these
subjects.

5.4.9 Entering Recurrence Information for an Activity


Access the Add Activity form to enter recurrence information while you are creating a
new activity, or access the Edit Activity form to add recurrence information to an
existing activity.

5-26 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Managing Activities

5.4.9.1 Recurrence
Select the Recurrence tab.

Daily, Weekly, Monthly, and Yearly


Select one of these options to specify how often the activity should occur. Then
complete the related fields to further define the recurrence pattern.

End After and End By


Select one of these options to specify when the recurrence pattern should end.

5.4.10 Managing Assignees for an Activity


Access the Add Activity form to enter assignees while you are creating a new activity,
or access the Edit Activity form to manage assignees for an existing activity. Scroll to
the Assignee portion of the form.

Note: The system does not display some of these fields when you
access this form from CRM programs or when the user type is set to
CRM in the processing options of the calling program (entry point).

Identifier Type
Select the identifier type for the entity to which you want to assign the activity.

Identifier
Enter the identifier to which you want to assign the activity.

Calendar Type
Enter the type of calendar for the value that is specified in the Identifier field.

Notify Assignees Now


Click to notify the assignees of the task or event.

Delete Assignee
Select an assignee in the grid, and then click this option to remove the assignee from
the activity.

5.4.11 Adding Tasks Using Quick Add


Access the Activity Homepage form. Scroll to the Quick Task Add section of the form.
Complete the fields in this section, and then click Add Task. The system automatically
adds the task to the user's calendar, along with the calendar for the specified customer
or address book number. If no calendar exists for that entity, the system creates a
calendar, and then adds the task to the calendar.

5.4.12 Searching for Activities


Access the Search for Activities form.
If you do not specify an employee in the Identifier ID field, the system displays only
the owner's activity record and not the participants' records when you search for
activities with multiple participants.

5.4.12.1 Basic
Select the Basic tab.

Using Foundation Calendar 5-27


Managing Activities

Activity Type
Specify the type of activity you are searching for. Values are stored in UDC 01/AC.

Owner Type
Specify the owner type of the activities for which you are searching. Values include:
Address Book
Branch/Plant
Company
State/Province
Union
Work Schedule

Owner
Specify the owner of the activities for which you are searching. The system uses the
value in this field along with the value in the Owner Type field. For example, if you
enter Company in the Owner Type field, you must enter a valid company number in
this field.

End Date
Enter the ending date in a range of dates in which to view activities. The system
displays all activities that end on or before the date that you enter.

Customer
Enter the address book number of the customer that is associated with the activity.

5.4.12.2 Advanced
Select the Advanced tab.

Calendar Type
Specify the type of calendar on which the activity resides. For example, if you are
searching for activities that are related to a customer, you might enter CRM to search
on CRM calendars only.

Activity Status
Specify the status of the activities for which you are searching. You can search for
completed or open activities.

Priority
Specify the priority level of the activities for which you are searching.

Start Date
Enter the beginning date in a range of dates in which to view events and tasks. The
system displays all events and tasks that end on or after the date that you enter.
The date range is restricted to 62 days if you do not specify an identifier ID.

End Date
Enter the ending date in a range of dates in which to view events and tasks. You must
enter a date in this field to view recurring events and tasks. The system displays all
events and tasks that begin on or before the date that you enter.

5-28 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Managing Activities

Owner Type
Specify the owner type of the activities for which you are searching. Values include:
Address Book
Branch/Plant
Company
State/Province
Union
Work Schedule

Owner
Specify the owner of the activities for which you are searching. The system uses the
value in this field along with the value in the Owner Type field. For example, if you
enter Company in the Owner Type field, you must enter a valid company number in
this field.

Identifier ID Type
Specify the identifier type that is associated with the activities for which you are
searching. Values include:
Address Book
Branch/Plant
Company
State/Province
Union
Work Schedule

Identifier Type
Specify the type of identifier that is associated with the activities for which you are
searching.

Identifier
Enter the identifier that you want to search for. The system uses the value in this field
along with the value in the Identifier Type field to determine which activities to
display. For example, if the value in the Identifier Type field is Address Book, you
must enter a valid address book number in this field. The system then searches for
activities that are associated with that address book number.

Associations
Enter a value in any of the following fields to search for activities that have been
associated with any of these entities:
Customer
Customer Contact
Partner
Partner Contact
Lead
Opportunity
Case

Using Foundation Calendar 5-29


Creating Action Plans

Recurring Activity Only


Select to search for recurring activities only.

5.4.13 Viewing Activities for Another User


Access the Activity Homepage form. Scroll to the View Activities For section of the
form.
Specify the user and calendar type that you want to view, and then click Find. If no
calendar exists that meets the specified criteria, the system displays an empty calendar
and task grid.

5.4.14 Updating the Status of an Activity


Access the Edit Activity form or the Activity Homepage form.
You can update the status of an activity by selecting the Completed option on the Edit
Activity form. You can also update the status of a task using the Activity Homepage
form. In the task section, search for the task that you want to update, select the
Completed option in the grid, and then click Complete.

Note: To reopen an activity, you must access the activity in the Edit
Activity form.

5.5 Creating Action Plans


This section provides an overview of action plans and discusses how to:
Set up action plans.
Add activities to action plans.

5.5.1 Understanding Action Plans


Using the Action Plan program (P01401), you can create a grouping of related activities
to use as a template. For example, you can set up an action plan for the activities that
are required when you obtain a new customer, such as making follow-up calls and
entering their information into the system. You can use action plans multiple times to
create the same grouping of events and tasks.
After you create action plans, you can use them to create activities that are linked to
various entities, such as address book numbers and CRM cases, using several JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne CRM programs. When you link action plans to specific
entities, the events appear on the assignees' calendars. The events and tasks that you
create as part of an action plan are not actually created in the F01301 table until you
link the action plan.
See "Linking Action Plans to Leads" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications
Customer Relationship Management for Sales Implementation Guide, "Setting Up Sales
Methodologies" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Customer Relationship
Management for Sales Implementation Guide, and "Managing the Sales Force" in the JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Customer Relationship Management for Sales
Implementation Guide.

5-30 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Creating Action Plans

See Also:
"Forms Used to Add Sales Team Members to Territories and
Industry Groupings" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications
Customer Relationship Management for Sales Implementation Guide.

5.5.2 Forms Used to Create Action Plans

Form Name FormID Navigation Usage


Search for Action Plan W01401C Foundation Calendar Search for existing
(G01A), Action Plan action plans.
Add Action Plan W01401D Click Add on the Create a new action
Search for Action Plan plan.
form.
Action Plan-Edit W01401B Click Edit on the Edit existing action
Search for Action Plan plans.
form.
Add activities to a
Click Save Changes new plan.
on the Add Action
Plan form.
Add Activity W01401E Click Add on the Add activities to the
Template Activity Template tab action plan.
on the Action
Plan-Edit form.

5.5.3 Setting Up Action Plans


Access the Add Action Plan form.

Action Plan Name


Enter up to 80 alphanumeric characters for the name of the action plan.

Description
Enter up to 1,999 characters for the description of the plan.

5.5.4 Adding Activities to Action Plans


Access the Add Activity Template form.

Subject
Specify the name of the activity. Enter up to 37 alphanumeric characters to describe the
activity. This description appears when you generate an actual activity from the
activity template by linking the action plan.

Activity Type
Enter the action type. The system uses this activity type when you generate an actual
activity from the activity template by linking the action plan.

Assigned To
Enter the address book number of the entity to which the activity is assigned. When a
user links the action plan, the system assigns the activity to the user who is linking the
action plan and also to the address book number that you specify in this field. If you
leave this field blank, the system assigns the activity only to the user who is linking the
action plan.

Using Foundation Calendar 5-31


Creating Action Plans

Priority Level
Enter a priority level for the activity.

Days to Complete
Enter the number of days that determine the start date of the activity. If you enter 0,
the activity starts on the day that a user links the action plan.

Start Time and End Time


Enter a start time and end time for the event. These fields are not required. If you leave
the Start Time field blank, at the time of linking the action plan the system uses the
starting time of the user's calendar as the default starting time for the event.

Note: If the action is a task, the system does not display these fields.

Description
Enter additional instructions for the activity.

5-32 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


6
Using Address Book Self Service
6

This chapter contains the following topics:


Section 6.1, "Understanding Address Book Self Service"
Section 6.2, "Using Self Service in the Address Book Revisions Program"
Section 6.3, "Using the Address Book Self Service Program"

6.1 Understanding Address Book Self Service


The self-service programs within the JD Edwards Address Book system enable your
customers and suppliers to review and revise their own address book information
online. Your customers and suppliers can use one of two programs to update their
information:
Address Book Revisions program
Address Book Self Service program
The Address Book Revisions program allows your customers and suppliers to update
only their mailing address, phone numbers, who's who information, and information
for category codes 11 through 30. The Address Book Self Service program allows
customers and suppliers to update their user profiles and information such as
company classification codes, stock exchange, and stock ticker symbol.

6.2 Using Self Service in the Address Book Revisions Program


This section provides an overview of self service for the Address Book Revisions
program and discusses how to activate self service for the Address Book Revisions
program.

6.2.1 Understanding Self Service for the Address Book Revisions Program
To allow customers and suppliers to use self service in the Address Book Revisions
program, you must enter 1 or 2 in the Self Service processing option for the program. If
you enter 1, you activate self service for customers. Entering 2 activates self service for
suppliers.
After you have activated self service for the Address Book Revisions program,
customers and suppliers can update the following information for their address book
record:
Mailing address.
Phone numbers.

Using Address Book Self Service 6-1


Using the Address Book Self Service Program

Contacts.
Phone numbers, electronic addresses, related person information, and alternate
addresses associated with the contacts.

6.2.2 Activating Self Service for the Address Book Revisions Program
Use the processing options for the Address Book Revisions program to activate self
service.
See Section 4.2.4, "Setting Processing Options for Address Book Revisions (P01012)"

6.3 Using the Address Book Self Service Program


This section provides an overview of the Address Book Self Service program and the
Contacts Self Service program and discusses how to:
Set processing options for Address Book Self Service (P01012SS).
Use the Address Book Self Service program.
Use the Contacts Self Service program.

6.3.1 Understanding the Address Book Self Service Program


The Address Book Self Service program (P01012SS) enables external users, such as
customers and suppliers, to review and revise their own address book information
online. Using the processing options for the Address Book Self Service program, you
can allow external users either to update their information or to only review it.
The Address Book Self Service program includes four tabs: General Info, Contacts,
Supplier Info, and Customer Info. The system displays the Supplier Info and
Customer Info tabs if it finds a supplier master and customer master record for the
address book record.
Using the Address Book Self Service program, external users can perform the
following actions for the address book record for their company:
Update mailing address information.
Update effective address information (if you have activated the Address By
Effective Date option in the Address Book constants).
Update user profile information.
Update company information, including:
Tax identification number
Tax exemption
Classification code values
Stock exchange
Stock ticker symbol
Number of employees
Year started
Growth rate
Annual revenue

6-2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Using the Address Book Self Service Program

DUNS number

See Also:
Setting Up Constants.
Adding Who's Who Information to Address Book Records.
"Entering Supplier Information, Using the Supplier Self Service
Program" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Accounts
Payable Implementation Guide.
"Using the Customer Self Service Program" in the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Applications Accounts Receivable Implementation
Guide.

6.3.2 Understanding the Contacts Self Service Program


When using the Address Book Self Service program, external users can access the
Contacts Self Service program (P0111SS) to update who's who information for their
company. The Contacts Self Service program allows customers and suppliers to
perform the following actions:
Update or delete phone numbers and electronic addresses attached to the address
book record.
Update, add, or delete contacts.
Update, add, or delete phone numbers and electronic address information for
contacts.
Specify a primary contact.

6.3.3 Forms Used to Update Address Book and Contact Information

Form Name FormID Navigation Usage


Self Service - Update W01012SSA Self Service Update address book
Address Book Record Applications information.
(4/G01101), Address
Update contact
Book Self Service
information.
Change Contact to an W0111SSB Select a contact name Update existing
Address Book Record on the Contacts tab on contact information.
the Self Service -
Add, update, or delete
Update Address Book
phone numbers and
Record form.
electronic addresses
for contacts.
Add Contact to an W0111SSB Click Add New Add a new contact.
Address Book Record Contact on the Self
Service - Update
Address Book Record
form.

6.3.4 Setting Processing Options for Address Book Self Service (P01012SS)
These processing options specify the default business phone number type, whether to
allow users to update their information, and default versions of the Address Book,
Supplier Master, Customer Master, and Contacts master business functions.

Using Address Book Self Service 6-3


Using the Address Book Self Service Program

6.3.4.1 Types
1. Business Phone Number Type
Specify the default phone number type to display on the Contacts tab. Select a value
from user-defined code (UDC) table 01/PH.

6.3.4.2 Entry
1. Allow Update Address
Specify whether to allow users to update their address information. Values are:
Blank: Allow users to update their address information.
1: Do not allow users to update their address information.

6.3.4.3 Versions
1. Address Book MBF (P0100041) Version
Specify the version of the Address Book MBF program to use.

2. Supplier Master MBF (P0100043) Version


Specify the version of the Supplier Master MBF program to use.

3. Contacts MBF (P0100087) Version


Specify the version of the Contacts MBF program to use.

4. Customer Master MBF (P0100042) Version


Reserved for future use.

6.3.5 Using the Address Book Self Service Program


Access the Self Service - Update Address Book Record form.
The fields that are available for update on the Self Service - Update Address Book
Record form are the same fields that appear on the Address Book Revisions form, the
Phone Numbers form, and the E-mail/Internet Revisions form.

Click this link to view the mailing address in the format in which it would appear on
mailing labels and reports. You specify mailing formats for each country in the
Country Constants Revisions program (P0070).
See Understanding Country Constants.
See Section 4.2.5, "Adding Address Book Records"
See Section 4.3.5, "Adding Phone Numbers to Who's Who Records"
See Adding Electronic Address Information to Who's Who Records.

6.3.6 Using the Contacts Self Service Program


Access the Change Contact to an Address Book Record form.
The fields that are available for update on the Change Contact to an Address Book
form are the same fields that appear on the Who's Who form, the Phone Numbers
form, and the E-mail/Internet Revisions form.
See Adding a Who's Who RecordAdding Phone Numbers to Who's Who
RecordsAdding Electronic Address Information to Who's Who Records.

6-4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


7
Updating and Purging Address Book Records
7

This chapter contains the following topics:


Section 7.1, "Understanding Address Book Update and Purge Programs"
Section 7.2, "Updating Address Book Records with Effective Dates"
Section 7.3, "Updating Category Codes"
Section 7.4, "Purging Address Book and Message Log Records"
Section 7.5, "(BRA) Purging Brazilian Address Book Records"

7.1 Understanding Address Book Update and Purge Programs


Periodically, you might need to update or purge address book information. To update
individual address book information, use the Address Book Revisions program
(P01012). To update many addresses simultaneously, use the Effective Address Update
program (R01840) or the Global Category Code Update program (R01490).
To purge information, use the Purge Address Book Records program (R01800P).

7.2 Updating Address Book Records with Effective Dates


This section provides an overview of address book updates, lists a prerequisite, and
discusses how to run the Effective Address Update program (R01840).

7.2.1 Understanding Address Book Updates


If you activate the Address by Effective Date constant in the Address Book Constants
program (P0000), you must run the Effective Address Update program (R01840)
periodically to ensure that the system is using the current date when you send
correspondence, billing, payments, and other mailings. Address book records are not
updated with new addresses unless you run this program.
When you run the R01840 program, the system updates the Address Book Master
table (F0101) with the effective date for the current address in the Address by Date
table (F0116). If you do not want to update all addresses, use data selection criteria to
limit the addresses. This program does not include processing options.
You can set up a version to update addresses to a date other than the current date. You
can use a date other than the current date to ensure that addresses are in effect for the
day that you mail correspondence instead of the day that the addresses were
generated.

Updating and Purging Address Book Records 7-1


Updating Category Codes

Note: The R01840 program will automatically run the R730101


program. For clients using Vertex

7.2.2 Prerequisite
Before you complete the tasks in this section, you must verify that the Address by
Effective Date option is selected in the Address Book Constants program.
See Setting Up Constants.

7.2.3 Running the Effective Address Update Program


Select A/B Advanced & Technical Operations (G0131), Effective Address Update.

7.3 Updating Category Codes


This section provides an overview of category code updates, lists a prerequisite, and
discusses how to:
Run the Global Category Code Update program
Set processing options for Global Category Code Update (R01490)

7.3.1 Understanding Category Code Updates


After you enter address book records, you might need to change category code
information. To make changes throughout the JD Edwards Address Book system, run
the Global Category Code Update program. You can update all address book records
with the category codes that you changed or you can update specific address book
records and category codes.
If you choose to update only specific records, use a processing option to identify which
address book records to update for each category code or leave the processing option
blank and use data selection to select which records to update.
Set a processing option to create a report that prints the changed records. Otherwise,
the system sends a message about the completion of the batch through workflow.

7.3.2 Prerequisite
Before you complete the tasks in this section, you must save a copy of the Address
Book Master table.

7.3.3 Running the Global Category Code Update Program


Select A/B Advanced & Technical Operations (G0131), Global Category Code Update.

7.3.4 Setting Processing Options for Global Category Code Update (R01490)
Processing options enable you to specify the default processing for programs and
reports.

7-2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Updating Category Codes

7.3.4.1 Criteria
1. Address Number
Specify an address book number if you want to update category codes for a specific
address number.

2. Employee
Specify whether to update category code values for employees. Values are:
N: No
Y: Yes

3. Customer
Specify whether to update category code values for customers. Values are:
N: No
Y: Yes

4. Supplier
Specify whether to update category code values for suppliers, and for which type of
suppliers to update category code values. Values are:
F: Foreign supplier
M: Miscellaneous, one-time supplier
N: No
Y: Yes

5. Enter 1 to create a report


Enter 1 if you want the system to print a report. If you leave this processing option
blank, the system does not print a report.

6. Enter a '1' to update Cat Codes left blank with blanks


Enter 1 if you want the system to update blank category code fields with a blank
value.

7.3.4.2 Address Fields


5. Business Unit
This processing option is for future use.

6. Credit Message
This processing option is for future use.

7. Search Type
This processing option is for future use.

7.3.4.3 Cat Code 115


Category Code 115
Enter the value to which you want the system to change the category code.

Category Code 1630


Enter the value to which you want the system to change the category code.

Updating and Purging Address Book Records 7-3


Purging Address Book and Message Log Records

7.4 Purging Address Book and Message Log Records


This section provides an overview of address book and message log purges, lists a
prerequisite, and discusses how to:
Run the Address Book Purge program.
Set processing options for Address Book Purge (R01800P).
Run the Purge Message Log program.
Set processing options for Purge Message Log (R01131P).

7.4.1 Understanding Address Book and Message Log Purges


Use the Purge Address Book Records program to purge records from the Address
Book Master table and the following related tables:
F0030 - Bank Transit Master.
F0030W - Bank Account/Supplier Number Worktable.
F01092 - Supplemental Database - Code.
F01093 - Supplemental Database - Narrative.
F0111 - Address Book - Who's Who.
F0115 - Address Book - Contact Phone Numbers.
F01151 - Electronic Address.
F01112 - Related Person.
F0116 - Address by Date.
F01161 - Alternate Address.
F0150 - Address Organization Structure Master.
F03012 - Customer Master by Line of Business.
F0401 - Supplier Master.
F01815 - AB Word Search Master.
The system does not purge an address book record if any related payor or address
book records are in a transaction table. If you set the processing option to run the
report in final mode, the system deletes records from the database if no corresponding
records are in other tables. You should run this report in proof mode before running it
in final mode if you are uncertain about the corresponding tables.
If you use the JD Edwards Electronic Mail system, you should periodically purge the
message log records from the PPAT Message Control File (F01131) and JDEM Multi
Level Message (F01131M) tables by running the Purge Message Log program
(R01131P). Use processing options to specify whether to purge messages by date
regardless of their status and, if so, the range of dates to purge. If a range of dates is
not specified, the system purges only deleted tasks.

7.4.2 Prerequisite
Before you complete the tasks in this section, you must verify that all users are signed
off the system.

7-4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Purging Address Book and Message Log Records

7.4.3 Running the Purge Address Book Records Program


Select A/B Advanced & Technical (G0131), Purge Address Book Records.

7.4.4 Setting Processing Options for Purge Address Book Records (R01800P)
Processing options enable you to specify the default processing for programs and
reports.

7.4.4.1 Defaults
1. Report Output
Specify whether to list purged records on the Address Book Purge report (R01800P). If
you specify not to list the purged records, the only output on the report will be the
number of address book records purged and the number of records processed. Values
are:
Blank: Do not list the purged records on the report.
1: List the purged records on the report.

2. Processing Mode
Specify whether to run the Address Book Purge program in Proof or Final mode.
Warning: Running this report in Final mode will cause address book and related table
records to be deleted. If you are unsure about deleting records permanently, this report
should be run in Proof mode.
When you run the program in final mode, it purges data from the Address Book
Master table (F0101) and the following related tables: F0030, F0030W, F01092, F01093,
F0111, F0115, F01151, F01112, F0116, F01161, F0150, F03012, F0401, and F01815. It also
produces a report indicating the number of records processed and the number of
records purged.
When you run the program in proof mode, it produces a report indicating the number
of records processed and the number that would be purged if the program were run in
final mode, but it does not purge any records. Values are:
Blank: Run the program in Proof mode.
1: Run the program in Final mode.

7.4.5 Running the Purge Message Log Program


Select A/B Advanced & Technical Operations (G0131), Purge Message Log.

7.4.6 Setting Processing Options for Purge Message Log (R01131P)


Processing options enable you to specify the default processing for programs and
reports.

7.4.6.1 Processing
1. Enter a 1 to purge tasks by date regardless of status.
Specify whether to purge tasks by date, regardless of status. If you leave this field
blank, the system purges only deleted tasks.

From Date
Specify a from date for the system to use when selecting records to purge, if you want
to delete by a date range.

Updating and Purging Address Book Records 7-5


(BRA) Purging Brazilian Address Book Records

Thru Date
Specify a through date for the system to use when selecting records to purge, if you
want to delete by a date range.

7.5 (BRA) Purging Brazilian Address Book Records


This section provides an overview of the Purge Brazilian Address Book Tag Files
program (R76011P) and discusses how to:
Run the Purge Brazilian Address Book Tag Files program.
Set processing options for Purge Brazilian Address Book Tag Files (R76011P).

7.5.1 Understanding the Purge Brazilian Address Book Tag Files Program
You run the Purge Brazilian Address Book program after you run the Address Book
Purge program (R01800P). When you run the Purge Brazilian Address Book program
in final mode, the system purges from the Address Book Brazilian Tag Table (F76011)
all records that do not have a corresponding record in the Address Book Master table
(F0101). The system then writes a record to the Archive Address Book Brazilian Tag
Table (F76011P) for each record that it purges from table F76011. Tables F76011 and
F76011P contain identical fields.

7.5.2 Running the Purge Brazilian Address Book Tag Files Program
Select Brazilian Localization Setup (G76B41B), Purge Brazilian Address Book Tag Files.

7.5.3 Setting Processing Options for Purge Brazilian Address Book Tag Files (R76011P)
Processing options enable you to specify the default processing for programs and
reports.

7.5.3.1 Defaults
Use these processing options to specify whether to run the program in proof or final
mode, and whether to display information about the records that are purged.

1. Report Output
Specify whether the report lists the records that are purged when you run the program
in final mode. If you specify to list the records and run the program in proof mode, the
report lists the records that will be purged when you run the program in final mode. If
you do not choose to list the records, the report contains only the number of records
purged. Values are:
Blank: Do not list the records.
1: List the records.

2. Processing Mode
Specify whether the report runs in proof or final mode. Values are:
Blank: Proof mode. The program produces a report that lists the total number of
records that will be deleted when you run R76011P in final mode. If you set the Report
Output processing option in R76011P to 1, the report also lists the records that will be
purged when you run R76011P in final mode. The program does not delete or purge
any records when you run it in proof mode.
1: Final mode. The system purges records from the Address Book Brazilian Tag table
(F76011), writes to the Archive Address Book Brazilian Tag table (F76011P) the records

7-6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


(BRA) Purging Brazilian Address Book Records

that are identical to the ones purged, and produces a report that prints the number of
records purged. If you set the Report Output processing option in R76011P to 1, the
report also lists the purged records.

Updating and Purging Address Book Records 7-7


(BRA) Purging Brazilian Address Book Records

7-8 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


8
Processing Batch Address Book Records
8

This chapter contains the following topics:


Section 8.1, "Understanding Batch Processing"
Section 8.2, "Adding Batch Address Book Records"
Section 8.3, "Uploading Address Book Batch Information"
Section 8.4, "Uploading Customer Master Batch Information"
Section 8.5, "Uploading Supplier Master Batch Information"
Section 8.6, "Uploading Who's Who Batch Information"
Section 8.7, "Revising Unprocessed Batches"
Section 8.8, "Revising Processed Batches"
Section 8.9, "Purging Address Book Batches"

8.1 Understanding Batch Processing


Batch processing enables you to convert address book, customer, supplier, and who's
who information from an external source and transfer it to the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Address Book system. To convert address information from an external
source, you must create a custom program that transfers the data from your external
system to specific fields in the corresponding batch input tables.
The custom program that you create must provide proper data to fields in these batch
input tables:
Address Book - Interoperability (F0101Z2)
Customer Master LOB - Batch (F03012Z1)
Supplier Master - Batch Upload (F0401Z1)
Batch Who's Who Information (F0111Z1)
Batch - Related Person (F01112Z1)
Phones-Interoperability (F0115Z1)
Batch - Electronic Address (F01151Z1)
Batch - Alternative Address (F01161Z1)
Certain fields are required to upload address book records. Additional fields that
include more detail are optional. Other fields are ignored or reserved for users.
See Mapping Fields for Batch Processing.

Processing Batch Address Book Records 8-1


Understanding Batch Processing

After you transfer information from an external source to the batch input tables, you
can review, add, revise, and delete address book, customer master, supplier master,
and who's who information. Then you run a batch upload program to process the
information and transfer it to the appropriate JD Edwards EnterpriseOne master
tables. The batch upload programs:
Create address records in the Address Book Master table (F0101).
Create address records in the Customer Master by Line of Business table (F03012),
if applicable.
Create address records in the Supplier Master table (F0401), if applicable.
Create address records in the Who's who table (F0111) if applicable.
Create records in the Related Person table (F01112).
Create records in the Electronic Address table (F01151).
Create records in the Alternate Address table (F01161).
Assign address book numbers, if applicable.
Supply information for blank fields.
Produce a report.
The batch upload programs generate reports that print the records processed, a total of
the number of records processed, and the records that were in error. You can change
records that were not processed and rerun the batch program. The processed batches
remain in the respective batch input tables until you purge the batch.
This diagram illustrates the batch process for the JD Edwards Address Book system:

Figure 81 Address Book batch processing

External Source

Supplier Master - Batch Who's Who


Address Book - Custom Master LOB - Batch
Batch Upload Information
Interoperability (F0101Z2) Table (F03012Z1)
(F0401Z1) (F0111Z1)

Contact Information
Address Book Batch Upload Custom Master Batch Upload Supplier Master Batch
Batch Upload
(R01010Z) (R03010Z) Upload (R04010Z)
(R011110Z)

Address Book Master Custom Master by Line of Supplier Master (F0401) Address Book - Who's Who
(F0101) Business (F03012) (F0111)
Address Book - Phone Related Person (F01112)
Numbers (F0115) Electronic Address (F01151)
Address by Date (F0116) Alternate Address (F01161)
Address Book - Phone
Numbers (F0115)

8-2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Adding Batch Address Book Records

8.2 Adding Batch Address Book Records


This section provides an overview of batch records and discusses how to create a new
batch and add records.

8.2.1 Understanding Batch Records


After you transfer data from your external system to the appropriate batch input
tables, you cannot add batch records to correct an existing batch. Instead, you must
create a new batch and add the records. Typically, you should not need to do this.
However, if you cannot revise a certain field on a batch record, you might delete the
batch record and add a new record using one of the batch revision programs.
Batch records exist in one or more of these tables:
Address Book - Interoperability (F0101Z2).
Customer Master LOB - Batch (F03012Z1).
Supplier Master - Batch (F0401Z1).
Batch Who's Who Information (F0111Z1).
Batch - Related Person (F01112Z1).
Batch - Electronic Address (F01151Z1).
Phones-Interoperability (F0115Z1).
Batch - Alternate Addresses (F01161Z1).

8.2.2 Forms Used to Add Batch Address Book Records

Form Name FormID Navigation Usage


Batch Address Book W0101Z1A A/B Advanced & Create a new batch
Revision Technical Operations and add records.
(G0131), Address
Book Batch Revision
Click Add on the
Work With Batch
Addresses form.
Batch Customer W0301Z1B A/B Advanced & Add batch records for
Master Revision Technical Operations customers.
(G0131), Customer
Master Batch Revision
Click Add on the
Work With Batch
Customer Master
form.
Batch Supplier Master W0401Z1A A/B Advanced & Add batch records for
Revision Technical Operations suppliers.
(G0131), Supplier
Master Batch Revision
Click Add on the
Work With Batch
Supplier Master form.

Processing Batch Address Book Records 8-3


Uploading Address Book Batch Information

Form Name FormID Navigation Usage


Who's Who Batch W01111Z1B A/B Advanced & Add batch records for
Revision Technical Operations who's who
(G0131), Who's Who information.
Batch Revision
Click Add on the
Work With Who's
Who Batch
Information form.

8.2.3 Creating a New Batch and Adding Records


Access the Batch Address Book Revision, Batch Customer Master Revision, Batch
Supplier Master Revision, or Who's Who Batch Revision form.

Transaction Number
Enter number for the transaction. In a non-EDI (electronic data interchange)
environment, you can assign any number that is meaningful to you to identify a
transaction within a batch. It can be the same as a JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
document number.

Action
Enter a code to indicate the activity that you want to perform on the transaction. In an
EDI transaction, this code represents the Transaction Set Purpose code or Change code.

Company
Enter the company number to use in line-of-business processing. The system creates
an additional record for the default company (00000). If you leave this field blank, the
system assigns company 00000 only.

8.3 Uploading Address Book Batch Information


This section provides an overview of the Address Book Batch Upload process, lists
prerequisites, and discusses how to:
Run the Address Book Batch Upload program.
Set processing options for Address Book Batch Upload (R01010Z).

8.3.1 Understanding the Address Book Batch Upload Process


After you convert address book information from an external source and transfer it to
the Address Book - Interoperability table, use the Address Book Batch Upload
program (R01010Z) to process the information and update these tables:
Address Book Master (F0101).
Address Book - Who's Who (F0111).
Address Book - Phone Numbers (F0115).
Address by Date (F0116).
If you have the JD Edwards Address Book system activated for duplicate record
validation, you will receive a message if the Address Book Batch Upload program
finds duplicate records. Depending on the type of message, the program does one of
the following actions:

8-4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Uploading Address Book Batch Information

For an error, the program sends the message to the work center where you can
review detailed information about the error. The program does not process the
batch of address book records.
For a warning, the program updates the batch of address book records. The
message in the work center indicates that the batch was created in error and the
message on a report indicates that the records were processed successfully. The
program processes the batch of address book records.
See Entering Address Book Records.

8.3.2 Prerequisites
Before you complete the tasks in this section, you must:
Review and, if necessary, revise address book batch records before you run the
Address Book Batch Upload program.
(CHL) Before you upload records for Chile:
Set the processing options for the PO - Address Book Batch Upload program
(R76H101Z1).
See "Setting Processing Options for Address Book Batch Upload (R76H101Z1)"
in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Localizations for Chile
Implementation Guide.
Provide proper data to the additional address book fields required for Chile in
the F76H101Z table.
Verify that corresponding versions of the PO - Address Book Batch Upload
program and the Address Book Batch Upload program exist.
(PER) Before you upload records for Peru:
Set the processing options for the PO - Address Book Batch Upload program.
See "Setting Processing Options for PO - Address Book Batch Upload
(R76P101Z1)" in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Localizations for Peru
Implementation Guide.
Provide proper data to the additional address book fields required for Peru in
the F76P101Z table.
Verify that corresponding versions of the PO - Address Book Batch Upload
program and the Address Book Batch Upload program exist.
See Revising Unprocessed Batches.

8.3.3 Running the Address Book Batch Upload Program


Select A/B Advanced & Technical Operations (G0131), Address Book Batch Upload.

8.3.4 Setting Processing Options for Address Book Batch Upload (R01010Z)
Processing options enable you to specify the default processing for programs and
reports.

Processing Batch Address Book Records 8-5


Uploading Customer Master Batch Information

8.3.4.1 Versions
1. Address Book MBF (P0100041)
Specify which version of the Address Book MBF program (P0100041) to use for this
report. If you leave this field blank, the system uses version ZJDE0001.

8.3.4.2 Process
1. Process Mode
Specify whether to run this report in proof or final mode. In proof mode, the system
prints the report only. In final mode, the system prints the report and updates the
Address Book Master table and, if applicable, any of these tables:
Address Book - Who's Who (F0111)
Electronic Address (F01151)
Address by Date (F0116)
Values are:
Blank: Proof mode
1: Final mode

8.4 Uploading Customer Master Batch Information


This section provides an overview of the Customer Master Batch Upload program
(R03010Z), lists prerequisites, and discusses how to:
Run the Customer Master Batch Upload program.
Set processing options for Customer Master Batch Upload (R03010Z).

8.4.1 Understanding the Customer Master Batch Upload Program


An address book number must exist in the Address Book Master table before you can
upload customer information. Enter the address book number in the Address Book
field of the Customer Master LOB - Batch table (F03012Z1) when you run the
Customer Master Batch Upload program.
The Customer Master Batch Upload program accesses the processed address book
records, retrieves the corresponding customer information in the F03012Z1 table and
uploads it to the Customer Master by Line of Business table.
If you have customer records that have an associated parent number, you must
manually enter the parent/child relationship. You cannot use the batch process to add
parent numbers. Parent numbers are stored in the Address Organization Structure
Master table (F0150).

Note: If you create your own version of the Address Book MBF
(P0100041), you must create a version of the Customer Master MBF
program (P0100042) with the same name, because the processing
options for the Customer Master Batch Upload program do not
contain an option to enter an Address Book MBF version.

8.4.2 Prerequisites
Before you complete the tasks in this section, you must:

8-6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Uploading Supplier Master Batch Information

Run the Address Book Batch Upload program to process address book
information.
Review and, if necessary, revise customer master batch records before you run the
Customer Master Batch Upload program.
See Revising Unprocessed Batches.

8.4.3 Running the Customer Master Batch Upload Program


Select A/B Advanced & Technical Operations (G0131), Customer Master Batch
Upload.

8.4.4 Setting Processing Options for Customer Master Batch Upload (R03010Z)
Processing options enable you to specify the default processing for programs and
reports.

8.4.4.1 Versions
1. Customer Master MBF (P0100042)
Specify which version of the Customer Master MBF program to use for this report. If
you leave this field blank, the system uses version ZJDE0001.

8.4.4.2 Process
1. Process Mode
Specify whether to run this report in proof or final mode. In proof mode, the system
prints the report only. In final mode, the system prints the report and updates the
Customer Master by Line of Business table. Values are:
Blank: Run the program in proof mode
1: Run the program in final mode.

8.5 Uploading Supplier Master Batch Information


This section provides an overview of the Supplier Master Batch Upload program
(R04010Z), lists prerequisites, and discusses how to:
Run the Supplier Master Batch Upload program.
Set processing options for Supplier Master Batch Upload (R04010Z).

8.5.1 Understanding the Supplier Master Batch Upload Program


An address book number must exist in the Address Book Master table before you can
upload converted external supplier information. Enter the address book number in the
Address Book field of the Supplier Master - Batch Upload table when you run the
Supplier Master Batch Upload program (R04010Z).
The Supplier Master - Batch Upload program accesses the processed address book
records, retrieves the corresponding supplier information in the F0401Z1 table, and
uploads it to the Supplier Master table.
If you have supplier records that have an associated parent number, you must
manually enter the parent/child relationship. You cannot use the batch process to add
parent numbers. Parent numbers are stored in the Address Organization Structure
Master table.

Processing Batch Address Book Records 8-7


Uploading Who's Who Batch Information

Note: If you create your own version of the Address Book MBF, you
must create a version of the Supplier Master MBF (P0100043) with the
same name, because the processing options for the Supplier Master
Batch Upload program do not contain an option to enter an Address
Book MBF version.

8.5.2 Prerequisites
Before you complete the tasks in this section, you must:
Run the Address Book Batch Upload program to process address book
information.
Review and, if necessary, revise supplier batch records before you run the Supplier
Master Batch Upload program.
See Revising Unprocessed Batches.

8.5.3 Running the Supplier Master Batch Upload Program


Select A/B Advanced & Technical Operations (G0131), Supplier Master Batch Upload.

8.5.4 Setting Processing Options for Supplier Master Batch Upload (R04010Z)
Processing options enable you to specify the default processing for programs and
reports.

8.5.4.1 Versions
1. Supplier Master MBF (P0100043)
Specify which version of the Supplier Master MBF program to use for this report. If
you leave this field blank, the system uses version ZJDE0001.

8.5.4.2 Process
1. Process Mode
Specify whether to run this report in proof or final mode. In proof mode, the system
prints the report only. In final mode, the system prints the report and updates the
Supplier Master table. Values are:
Blank: Run this program in proof mode.
1: Run this program in final mode

8.6 Uploading Who's Who Batch Information


This section provides an overview of the Who's Who Batch Upload program
(R011110Z), lists prerequisites, and discusses how to:
Run the Who's Who Batch Upload program.
Set processing options for Who's Who Batch Upload (R011110Z).

8.6.1 Understanding the Who's Who Batch Upload Program


An address book number must exist in the Address Book Master table before you can
upload converted external who's who information. Enter the address book number in

8-8 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Uploading Who's Who Batch Information

the Address Book field of the Batch Who's Who Information table (F0111Z1) when you
run the Who's Who Batch Upload program.
The Who's Who Batch Upload program accesses the processed address book records,
retrieves the corresponding who's who information in the F0111Z1 table, and uploads
it to these tables:
Address Book - Who's Who (F0111).
Related Person (F01112).
Address Book - Phone Numbers (F0115).
Electronic Address (F01151).
Alternate Address (F01161).
After the Who's Who Batch Upload program successfully processes a who's who
record, the program searches for who's who information in the F01161Z1, F01151Z1,
F0115Z1, and F01112Z1 tables using the batch number, transaction number, and user
ID from the F0111Z1 table. When the program finds records with values that match
those in the Batch Who's Who Information table, it selects those that have not been
successfully processed in this order:
1. F01161Z1
2. F01151Z1
3. F01112Z1
4. F0115Z1
When processing phone information, the program uses additional data selection to
process phone numbers for related person records first. Then the program processes
phone numbers for who's who records. The program uses the value in the EDI Line
Number (EDLN) field in the F01112Z1 table to determine whether a phone number
record is for a related person or who's who record. The value in the EDLN field is 0
when the phone number record is for a who's who record.
If errors occur on the child records (phone numbers, electronic addresses, and so on)
when you run the Who's Who Batch Upload program, you can reprocess them after
correcting the errors. The Who's Who Batch Upload report prints both successfully and
unsuccessfully processed records.

8.6.2 Prerequisites
Before you complete the tasks in this section, you must:
Run the Address Book Batch Upload program to process address book
information.
Review and, if necessary, revise who's who batch records before you run the Who's
Who Batch Upload program.
See Revising Unprocessed Batches.

8.6.3 Running the Who's Who Batch Upload Program


Select A/B Advanced & Technical Operations (G0131), Who's Who Batch Upload.

Processing Batch Address Book Records 8-9


Revising Unprocessed Batches

8.6.4 Setting Processing Options for Who's Who Batch Upload (R011110Z)
Processing options enable you to specify the default processing for programs and
reports.

8.6.4.1 Options
1. Upload Child Tables
Specify whether to upload records in the child tables, which include:
Batch-Alternative Address (F01161Z1).
Batch-Related Person (F01112Z1).
Batch-Electronic Address (F01151Z1).
Phones-Interoperability (F0115Z1).
Values are:
Blank: Do not upload records in child tables.
1: Upload records in child tables.

2. Synchronize Address (Future)


Specify whether to synchronize Address Book Master and Alternate Address tables
when you enter contact information. Values are:
Blank: Do not synchronize.
1: Synchronize.

8.7 Revising Unprocessed Batches


This section provides an overview of batches that did not process successfully and
discusses how to revise an unprocessed batch record.

8.7.1 Understanding Batches That Did Not Process Successfully


After you run the upload program, you review the batches to determine which ones
processed successfully and which did not. You must revise batches that did not
process successfully.
Batch records that did not process successfully reside in these batch input tables:
Address Book - Interoperability (F0101Z2).
Customer Master LOB - Batch (F03012Z1).
Supplier Master - Batch Upload (F0401Z1).
Batch Who's Who Information (F0111Z1).
Batch - Related Person (F01112Z1).
Phones-Interoperability (F0115Z1).
Batch - Electronic Address (F01151Z1).
Batch -Alternative Address (F01161Z1).
If a batch did not process successfully, use the appropriate form to correct the records
and rerun the upload program. The system updates records in the appropriate batch
input table.

8-10 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Revising Processed Batches

8.7.2 Forms Used to Revise Unprocessed Batches

Form Name FormID Navigation Usage


Batch Address Book W0101Z1A A/B Advanced & Revise unprocessed
Revision Technical Operations batch records for
(G0131), Address address book.
Book Batch Revision.
On the Work With
Batch Addresses form,
select a record and
click Select.
Work With Batch W0301Z1B A/B Advanced & Revise unprocessed
Customer Master Technical Operations batch records for
(G0131), Customer customers.
Master Batch Revision
Select the batch, and
click Select on the
Work With Batch
Customer Master
form.
Work With Batch W0401Z1A A/B Advanced & Revise unprocessed
Supplier Master Technical Operations batch records for
(G0131), Supplier suppliers.
Master Batch Revision
Select the batch, and
click Select on the
Work With Batch
Supplier Master form.
Work with Who's W0111Z1B A/B Advanced & Revise unprocessed
Who Batch Technical Operations batch records for
Information (G0131), Who's Who who's who (contacts).
Batch Revision
Phones Batch W0111Z1G Select the batch, and Enter phone numbers
Revision select Phones from the for who's who
Row menu on the records.
Work With Who's
Who Batch Revision
form.

8.7.3 Revising Unprocessed Batch Records


Access the Batch Address Book Revision, Batch Customer Master Revision, Batch
Supplier Master Revision, or Batch Contact Information Revision form.
This task shows the Batch Address Book Revision form.

8.8 Revising Processed Batches


This section provides an overview of batches that processed successfully and lists the
forms used to revise processed batches.

8.8.1 Understanding Successfully Processed Batches


After you run the upload program, you review the batches to determine which ones
processed successfully and which did not. You must revise batches that processed
successfully but are incorrect.

Processing Batch Address Book Records 8-11


Purging Address Book Batches

Batch records that processed successfully reside in these tables:


Address Book Master (F0101).
Customer Master by Line of Business (F03012).
Supplier Master (F0401).
Address Book - Who's Who (F0111).
Related Person (F01112).
Electronic Address (F01151).
Alternate Address (F01161).
Address Book- Contact Phone Numbers (F0115).
If a batch record processed successfully but is incorrect, use the appropriate form to
correct the records.

8.8.2 Forms Used to Revise Processed Batches

Form Name FormID Navigation Usage


Address Book W01012A Daily Processing Revise processed
Revisions (G0110), Address address book records.
Book Revisions
Click Select on the
Work with Addresses
form.
Customer Master W03013B Customer Invoice Revise processed
Revision (P03013) Entry (G03B11), customer master
Customer Master records.
Information
Click Select on the
Work with Customer
Master form.
Supplier Master W04012A Supplier & Voucher Revise processed
Revision (P04012) Entry (G0411), supplier master
Supplier Master records.
Information
Click Select on the
Work with Supplier
Master form.
Work with Contact W01111A Daily Processing Revise processed
Information (G0110), Address contact information
Book Revisions records.
Select Who's Who
from the Row menu
on the Work with
Addresses form.
Select Contact
Information from the
Row menu on the
Who's Who form.

8.9 Purging Address Book Batches


This section provides an overview of the Address Book Batch Purge program, lists a
prerequisite, and discusses how to:

8-12 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Purging Address Book Batches

Run the Address Book Batch Purge program.


Set processing options for Address Book Batch Purge (R0101Z1P).

8.9.1 Understanding the Address Book Batch Purge Program


After you successfully upload and process address book, supplier master, customer
master, and contact information batches and the records exist in one of the various
master tables, you can purge the batches.
Depending on how you set the processing options for the Address Book Batch Purge
program (R0101Z1P), the system purges all processed batches from one or more of
these batch input tables:
Address Book - Interoperability (F0101Z2).
Customer Master LOB - Batch (F03012Z1).
Supplier Master - Batch Upload (F0401Z1).
Batch Who's Who Information (F0111Z1).
Batch - Related Person (F01112Z1).
Batch - Electronic Address (F01151Z1).
Batch - Alternative Address (F01161Z1).
For each of these batch input tables, processed batches contain either a 1 or Y in the
Processed field (EDSP) to indicate that the record was processed successfully.

8.9.2 Prerequisite
Before you complete the tasks in this section, you must back up these batch input
tables:
Address Book - Interoperability (F0101Z2).
Customer Master LOB - Batch Table (F03012Z1).
Supplier Master - Batch Upload (F0401Z1).
Batch Who's Who Information (F0111Z1).
Batch - Related Person (F01112Z1).
Batch - Electronic Address (F01151Z1).
Batch - Alternative Address (F01161Z1).
Phones - Interoperability (F0115Z1).

8.9.3 Running the Address Book Batch Purge Program


Select A/B Advanced & Technical Operations (G0131), Address Book Batch Purge.

8.9.4 Setting Processing Options for Address Book Batch Purge (R0101Z1P)
Processing options enable you to specify the default processing for programs and
reports.

Processing Batch Address Book Records 8-13


Purging Address Book Batches

8.9.4.1 Select
1. Purge Customer Master Batch table
Specify whether to purge all processed records with search type C (customer) in the
Customer Master Lob - Batch table. Values are:
Blank: Do not purge processed customer records.
1: Purge processed customer records.

2. Purge Supplier Master Batch table


Specify whether to purge all processed records with search type V (supplier) in the
Supplier Master - Batch Upload table. Values are:
Blank: Do not purge processed supplier records.
1: Purge processed supplier records.

3. Purge Address Book Batch table


Specify whether to purge all processed records in the Address Book - Interoperability
table and, if applicable, any of these tables:
Batch Who's Who Information (F0111Z1)
Batch - Related Person (F01112Z1)
Batch - Alternative Address (F01161Z1)
Batch - Electronic Address (F01151Z1)
Phones-Interoperability (F0115Z1)
Values are:
Blank: Do not purge processed records.
1: Purge processed records.

8-14 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


A
AMapping Fields for Batch Processing

This appendix contains the following topics:


Section A.1, "Mapping Fields in the Address Book - Interoperability Table
(F0101Z2)"
Section A.2, "Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table
(F03012Z1)"
Section A.3, "Mapping Fields in the Supplier Master - Batch Table (F0401Z1)"
Section A.4, "Mapping Fields in the Batch Who's Who Information Table
(F0111Z1)"
Section A.5, "Mapping Fields in the Batch - Related Person Table (F01112Z1)"
Section A.6, "Mapping Fields in the Phones - Interoperability Table (F0115Z1)"
Section A.7, "Mapping Fields in the Batch - Electronic Address Table (F01151Z1)"
Section A.8, "Mapping Fields in the Batch - Alternative Address Table (F01161Z1)"

A.1 Mapping Fields in the Address Book - Interoperability Table


(F0101Z2)
This section contains a list of the fields in the F0101Z2 table. Some of the fields are
required to run the Address Book Batch Upload program (R01010Z), while others are
not. Not all fields are displayed on address book forms or used by the Address Book
system.

A.1.1 Required Fields


This table lists the required fields for the F0101Z2 table:

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-1


Mapping Fields in the Address Book - Interoperability Table (F0101Z2)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


EDI - User ID SZEDUS Alpha 10 A user-defined
identification
number. Enter
the user ID of the
person who runs
the R01010Z
program or the
person who is to
receive messages
in the Employee
Work Center.
This field, in
conjunction with
SZEDTN and
SZEDBT,
uniquely
identifies a
specific
transaction.
EDI - Batch SZEDBT Alpha 15 A number
Number assigned by the
person who runs
the Address Book
Batch Upload
program to each
batch. The
system assigns a
new batch
number
whenever this
field changes.
You can
significantly
increase
performance by
assigning one
batch number for
each group of
transactions that
you process.
EDI - Transaction SZEDTN Alpha 22 A number that
Number identifies each
transaction. A
new transaction
number indicates
a different
address book
record. You
cannot have
more than one
transaction with
the same number
in a batch. This
field often
contains the
document
number of the
source system so
that the sender
can readily
identify the
transaction.

A-2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Address Book - Interoperability Table (F0101Z2)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


EDI - Line SZEDLN Number 7 A number used
Number to uniquely
identify a record.
Each transaction
can have
multiple,
consecutive line
numbers.
EDI - SZEDSP Alpha 1 A value that
Successfully indicates
Processed whether a
transaction was
successfully
processed. Leave
this field blank.
The value N
indicates that the
transaction was
not processed or
was processed in
error.
The system
changes the
value to Y when
the transaction is
successfully
processed.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-3


Mapping Fields in the Address Book - Interoperability Table (F0101Z2)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Transaction SZTNAC Alpha 1 A value that
Action indicates the
transaction to be
performed. The
value A indicates
a new
transaction. The
value D indicates
a deletion. The
value A indicates
an add. The
value C indicates
a change to an
existing
document. You
must process
changes after you
process
additions.
For outbound
processing, the
system updates
the value in this
field with after
image (UA) or
before image
(UB). The system
uses UB only if
the processing
option in the
Address Book
MBF (P0100041)
is activated.
For outbound
processing, you
can also enter A
for additions and
D for deletions.

A-4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Address Book - Interoperability Table (F0101Z2)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Business Unit SZMCU Alpha 12 A value that
identifies the
business unit that
is used for
security
purposes. The
value in this field
is also used by
transaction entry
programs and
can be
concatenated
with the object
account of certain
automatic
accounting
instructions
(AAIs) to derive
an account
number. If you
leave this field
blank, the system
assigns a value of
1.
The value must
exist in the
Business Unit
Master table
(F0006).
Tax ID SZTAX Alpha 20 The identification
code required by
various tax
authorities. This
might be a social
security number,
federal or state
corporate tax ID,
or sales tax
number.
This field is
required only if
the value of the
Search Type field
(SZAT1) is E and
the country code
is US or CAN.
Alpha Name SZALPH Alpha 40 A name typically
entered in the
format of last
name, first name
to optimize
search
capabilities. The
Word Search
program
(P01BDWRD)
uses this field.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-5


Mapping Fields in the Address Book - Interoperability Table (F0101Z2)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Search Type SZAT1 Alpha 3 A value that
identifies a
record as part of
a specific group,
such as suppliers,
customers,
employees, and
companies. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in
UDC table 01/ST
(Search Type).

A.1.2 Optional Fields


These fields in the F0101Z2 table are optional. You can use these fields to provide
additional information about a transaction.

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Type - SZTYTN Alpha 8 A value that
Transaction identifies the
type of
transaction. If
you leave this
field blank, the
system uses the
value in the
transaction type
processing option
in the Address
Book MBF
(P0100041), if it is
set up.
This field is
required if you
use outbound
processing.

A-6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Address Book - Interoperability Table (F0101Z2)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Direction SZDRIN Alpha 1 A number that
Indicator identifies
whether a batch
job is inbound or
outbound
processing.
For inbound
processing, enter
0.
For outbound
processing, leave
this field blank.
The system
updates this field
with 1 if the
record is a
"before image"
and 2 if the
record is an "after
image." A
processing option
in the Address
Book MBF
(P0100041)
determines
whether a before
image is written
to the table.
EDI - Detail Lines SZEDDL Number 5 The number of
Processed detail lines
included in a
specific
transaction. This
field is
informational
only.
Trading Partner SZPNID Alpha 15 A value used in
ID an Electronic
Data Interchange
(EDI) transaction
to identify who is
trading
documents with
you.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-7


Mapping Fields in the Address Book - Interoperability Table (F0101Z2)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Address Number SZAN8 Number 8 A value that
uniquely
identifies a
supplier,
customer,
employee,
company, and so
on.
If you leave this
field blank, the
system assigns a
number based on
the Next
Numbers
Automatic table
(F0002) for the
Address Book
system.
If you enter a
value in this
field, it cannot
exist in the
Address Book
Master table
(F0101) unless
the SZTNAC
field has a value
of C, which
indicates a
change to an
existing record.
Otherwise, the
system considers
the transaction a
duplicate and
does not process
it.
Note: This field is
required when
the SZTNAC
field is C, which
indicates a
change to an
existing record.

A-8 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Address Book - Interoperability Table (F0101Z2)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Long Address SZALKY Alpha 20 A value that
Number identifies an
address book
record in a
format other than
that assigned by
the system.
Typically, you
enter an address
number from a
legacy system to
use as a
cross-reference to
the address book
number assigned
by the JD
Edwards
EnterpriseOne
system. If you
enter a value in
this field, the
value cannot
exist in any other
address book
record or the
system will
consider it a
duplicate record
and not process
it.
Industry SZSIC Alpha 10 A code that
Classification classifies goods
Code and services such
as the standard
industry code
(SIC).
Language SZLNGP Alpha 2 A code that
indicates the
language to use
on forms and for
reports. If you
enter a value in
this field, the
value must exist
in UDC table
01/LP (Language
Preference).
If you leave this
field blank, the
system uses the
language
specified in the
user profile of the
person who runs
the process. If
that is blank, the
system uses the
default language
for the system.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-9


Mapping Fields in the Address Book - Interoperability Table (F0101Z2)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Credit Message SZCM Alpha 2 A code that
displays specific
information
about a customer
or supplier. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in
UDC table
00/CM (Credit
Messages).
Person/ SZTAXC Alpha 1 A code that
Corporation designates the
Code type of taxpayer.
For U.S. clients,
use one of these
codes in
conjunction with
the SZTAX field:
C: Corporate
entity
P: Individual
N: Noncorporate
entity
The system
chooses suppliers
with codes P and
N for 1099
reporting.
For non-U.S.
clients, use one of
these codes in
conjunction with
the SZTAX field:
1: Individual
2: Corporate
entity

A-10 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Address Book - Interoperability Table (F0101Z2)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


AR/AP Netting SZAT2 Alpha 1 An option that
Indicator indicates
whether
customers and
suppliers are
eligible for
AR/AP netting.
Values are:
Y: Eligible for
AR/AP netting.
The system
updates invoices
and vouchers
that are entered
for the address
number with a
value of 1
(Eligible for
Netting) in the
Netting Status
field.
N: Ineligible for
AR/AP netting.
The system
updates invoices
and vouchers
that are entered
for the address
number with a
value of 0
(Ineligible for
Netting) in the
Netting Status
field.
Address Type 3 SZAT3 Alpha 1 A code that is
reserved for
future use.
Address Type 4 SZAT4 Alpha 1 A code that is
reserved for
future use.
Address Type - SZATR Alpha 1 A code that
Receivables indicates
whether the
address book
record is a
customer. Values
are Y and N.
Address Type 5 SZAT5 Alpha 1 A code that is
reserved for
future use.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-11


Mapping Fields in the Address Book - Interoperability Table (F0101Z2)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Address Type - SZATP Alpha 1 A code that
Payables indicates
whether the
address book
record is a
supplier. Values
are: Y (yes), N
(no), M
(miscellaneous,
one-time
supplier), and F
(foreign
supplier). The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in
UDC table
H01/AS
(Address
Type-Payables).
Address Type - SZATPR Alpha 1 A code that can
Code, Purchaser be defined in the
data dictionary to
reference the
address book
record.
Miscellaneous SZAB3 Alpha 1 A code that is
Code reserved for
future use.
Address Type - SZATE Alpha 1 A code that
Employee indicates
whether the
address book
record is an
employee. Values
are: Y and N.
Subledger SZSBLI Alpha 1 A blank indicates
Inactive Code that the address
book number can
be used as a
subledger.

A-12 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Address Book - Interoperability Table (F0101Z2)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Beginning SZEFTB Date 6 The date that the
Effective Date address book
record first
becomes
effective. Use a
format that your
database accepts.
Some databases
allow you to
enter the date in
a Gregorian date
format (mmddyy
or yymmdd),
while other
databases require
a Julian date
format.
The Julian date
format is cyyddd
(where c =
century). Enter 1
for transactions
in the 21st
century. For
example, the date
6/1/2005
corresponds to a
Julian date
105152. For
6/1/04, the
corresponding
Julian date is
104153 (because
the year 2000 has
a leap day,
2/29/00).
Address Number SZAN81 Number 8 A related address
- 1st book number
(salesperson, law
firm, accountant,
and so on). Many
address book
programs allow
you to inquire on
records based on
a related address
number.
The value that
you enter in this
field must exist
in the table
before you run
the batch process.
Therefore, if you
enter a related
address book
number, you
must process the
related address
records first.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-13


Mapping Fields in the Address Book - Interoperability Table (F0101Z2)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Address Number SZAN82 Number 8 See the
- 2nd description for
the SZAN81
field.
Address Number SZAN83 Number 8 See the
- 3rd description for
the SZAN81
field.
Address Number SZAN84 Number 8 See the
- 4th description for
the SZAN81
field.
Address Number SZAN86 Number 8 See the
- 5th description for
the SZAN81
field.
Factor Special SZAN85 Number 8 An address book
Payee number that
identifies a
special payment
address in
accounts payable.
The value that
you enter in this
field must exist
in the F0101 table
before you run
the batch process.
Address Book SZAC01 through Alpha 3 A category code.
Category Codes SZAC30 The values that
01 through 30 you enter in the
category code
fields must exist
in the
corresponding
UDC table
01/01-01/30.
Category code 7
is used for 1099
reporting in the
Accounts
Payable system.

A-14 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Address Book - Interoperability Table (F0101Z2)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


G/L Bank SZGLBA Alpha 8 A value that
Account identifies the
bank account in
the general
ledger that is
associated with
the address book
record. This field
is informational
only and is not
used in any JD
Edwards
EnterpriseOne
financial
transactions.
Bank accounts
associated with
financial
transactions are
updated based
on automatic
accounting
instructions
(AAIs).
Time - Scheduled SZPTI Number 6 The specific time
In when a person is
scheduled to
return. The
format required
is HH.MM.
Date - Scheduled SZPDI Date 6 The date when a
In person is
scheduled to
return. Use a
format that your
database accepts.
Some databases
allow you to
enter the date in
a Gregorian date
format while
other databases
require a Julian
date format.
See the
description for
the SZEBDT field
for more
information.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-15


Mapping Fields in the Address Book - Interoperability Table (F0101Z2)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Action - Message SZMSGA Alpha 1 A code that
Control indicates
whether the
system displays
messages in
workflow. The
value Y indicates
that the system
displays all
messages,
including
messages that
have been
cleared or
processed. A
value other than
Y indicates that
the system
displays only
current
messages.
Remark SZRMK Alpha 30 An informational
field that you can
use for a remark,
description, or
name. The
system does not
display this field
on any forms in
the Address Book
system.
Certificate - Tax SZTXCT Alpha 20 A number that
Exemption identifies a
license or
certificate that
tax authorities
issue to
tax-exempt
individuals and
companies.
Additional Tax SZTX2 Alpha 20 An additional
ID - Individual identification
number that a tax
authority assigns
to an individual.
Secondary Alpha SZALP1 Alpha 40 An alternate
Name name to
accommodate
double-byte
coding.
Mailing Name SZMLNM Alpha 40 The name that
appears on
reports and
labels for mailing
purposes. If you
leave this field
blank, the value
entered in the
SZALPH field is
used.

A-16 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Address Book - Interoperability Table (F0101Z2)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Secondary SZMLN1 Alpha 40 An alternate
Mailing Name name to
accommodate
double-byte
coding.
Address Line 1, SZADD1 Alpha 40 Alphanumeric
Address Line 2, SZADD2 values that
Address Line 3, SZADD3 identify the
Address Line 4 SZADD4 mailing address
for the address
book record.
Postal Code SZADDZ Alpha 12 A code assigned
by the postal
service of a
country that is
attached to the
address to
facilitate mail
delivery.
City SZCTY1 Alpha 25 The city
associated with
an address.
Country SZCTR Alpha 3 The country
associated with
an address. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in
UDC table
00/CN (Country
Codes).
State SZADDS Alpha 3 The state or
province
associated with
an address. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in the
UDC table 00/S
(State or
Province).
County SZCOUN Alpha 25 The county,
parish, or other
political district
associated with
an address for
mail delivery or
for tax purposes.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-17


Mapping Fields in the Address Book - Interoperability Table (F0101Z2)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Phone Prefix SZAR1 Alpha 6 The area code in
the U.S. or the
prefix in another
country for a
telephone
number. The
required format
for the U.S. is
three characters
in parentheses.
If an alternate
format is
required for
non-U.S. area
codes, the
Display Rules
field in the Data
Dictionary for
item AR1 must
be changed.
Phone Number SZPH1 Alpha 20 The telephone
number
associated with
the address book
record.
Phone Number SZPHT1 Alpha 4 A code that
Type 1 designates the
type of phone
number
associated with
the SZPH1 field.
For example,
FAX, CELL,
HOME, WORK.
The value
entered in this
field must exist
in the UDC table
01/PH (Phone
Type).
Phone Prefix 2 SZAR2 Alpha 6 The area code in
the U.S. or the
prefix in another
country for a
telephone
number. The
required format
for the U.S. is
three characters
in parentheses.
If an alternate
format is
required for
non-U.S. area
codes, the
Display Rules
field in the Data
Dictionary for
item AR1 must
be changed.

A-18 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Address Book - Interoperability Table (F0101Z2)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Phone Number 2 SZPH2 Alpha 20 A second
telephone
number
associated with
the address book
record.
Phone Number SZPHT2 Alpha 4 A code that
Type 2 designates the
type of phone
number
associated with
the SZPH2 field.
For example,
FAX, CELL,
HOME, WORK.
The value
entered in this
field must exist
in the UDC table
01/PH (Phone
Type).
Ticker SZTICKER Alpha 10 A code that
designates the
stock ticker for
the company.
Stock Exchange SZEXCHG Alpha 10 A code that
designates the
exchange on
which the
company's stock
is traded.
DUNS Number SZDUNS Alpha 13 A code used to
designate the
DUNS number
for the company.
This number is
the Dun and
Bradstreet
identifier that is
used to get credit
reports on
companies.
CLASS01 SZCLASS01 Alpha 3 A code used to
classify
companies. Enter
a valid value
from UDC
01/CA.
CLASS02 SZCLASS02 Alpha 3 A code used to
classify
companies. Enter
a valid value
from UDC
01/CB.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-19


Mapping Fields in the Address Book - Interoperability Table (F0101Z2)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


CLASS03 SZCLASS03 Alpha 3 A code used to
classify
companies. Enter
a valid value
from UDC
01/CC.
CLASS04 SZCLASS04 Alpha 3 A code used to
classify
companies. Enter
a valid value
from UDC
01/CD.
CLASS05 SZCLASS05 Alpha 3 A code used to
classify
companies. Enter
a valid value
from UDC
01/CE.
Number of SZNOE Number 15 A number used
Employees to designate the
number of
employees
employed by the
customer or
supplier.
Growth Rate SZGROWTHR Number 8 A code used to
designate the
growth rate for a
company.
Year Started SZYEARSTAR Alpha 15 A code that
designates the
year a company
became a
customer.
Employee Group SZAEMPGP Alpha 5 A code that
Approvals indicates the
group for the
employee for
approval
processing. This
field is used only
in Requisition
Self Service.
Future Use SZACTIN Character 1 This field is
Indicator reserved for
future use.
Revenue Range SZREVRNG Alpha 5 An amount used
to designate the
revenue range for
a company. Enter
a valid value
from UDC
01/RR.

A-20 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Address Book - Interoperability Table (F0101Z2)

A.1.3 Ignored Fields


This table lists fields in the F0101Z2 table that are ignored. The system does not use the
values in these fields.

Field Name Alias Type Length


EDI - Document Type SZEDCT Alpha 2
EDI - Translation SZEDFT Alpha 10
Format
EDI - Transmission SZEDDT Date 6
Date
Description - SZDC Alpha 40
Compressed
Transaction SZTORG Alpha 10
Originator
User ID SZUSER Alpha 10
Program ID SZPID Alpha 10
Work Station ID SZJOBN Alpha 10
Date Updated SZUPMJ Date 6
Time of Day SZTDAY Date 6
Time Last Updated SZUPMT Number 6

A.1.4 User-Reserved Fields


This table lists fields in the F0101Z2 table that are reserved for users. These fields are
not updated by any JD Edwards EnterpriseOne programs. The Address Book system
does not display them on any forms.

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


User Reserved SZURCD Alpha 3 A user-defined
Code alphanumeric
value up to three
characters.
User Reserved SZURDT Date 6 A user-defined
Date date that uses a
format that your
database accepts.
User Reserved SZURAT Number 15 A user-defined
Amount amount that uses
a format that
your database
accepts.
User Reserved SZURAB Number 8 A user-defined
Number number up to
eight digits.
User Reserved SZURRF Alpha 15 A user-defined
Reference alphanumeric
value up to 15
characters.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-21


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

A.2 Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)


This section contains a list of the fields in the F03012Z1 table. Some of the fields are
required to run the Customer Master Batch Upload program (R03010Z), while others
are not.

A.2.1 Required Fields


This table lists fields in the F03012Z1 table that are required. For some fields, blank is a
valid value.

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


EDI - User ID VOEDUS Alpha 10 A user-defined
identification
number. Enter
the user ID of the
person running
the process or the
person who is to
receive messages
in the Employee
Work Center
program
(P012501). This
field, in
conjunction with
the VOEDTN
and VOEDBT
fields, uniquely
identifies a
specific
transaction.
EDI - Batch VOEDBT Alpha 15 A code that, in
Number conjunction with
the VOEDTN
and VOEDUS
fields, uniquely
identifies a
transaction
within a specific
batch. This field
also serves as a
level break and
causes the
assignment of a
new JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne
batch number
each time that the
value changes.
You can
significantly
increase
performance by
assigning one
batch number for
each group of
transactions.

A-22 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


EDI - Transaction VOEDTN Number 22 A code that
Number identifies each
transaction. Each
new transaction
number indicates
a different
address book
record. You
cannot have
more than one
transaction with
the same number
in a batch. This
field often
contains the
document
number of the
source system so
that the
transaction can
be readily
identified.
EDI - Line VOEDLN Number 7 A number used
Number to uniquely
identify a record.
Each transaction
can have
multiple,
consecutive line
numbers.
EDI - VOEDSP Alpha 1 Leave this field
Successfully blank. The
Processed system populates
this field to
indicate whether
the transaction
was successfully
processed. The
value N indicates
that the
transaction was
not processed or
was processed in
error. After the
transaction is
successfully
processed, the
system changes
the value to Y.
For outbound
processing, the
system updates
the value to N.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-23


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Transaction VOTNAC Alpha 2 If you are
Action processing new
transactions,
enter A in this
field. If you are
processing a
change for an
existing record,
enter C. If you
are processing a
deletion for an
existing record,
enter D. Process
all changes and
deletions after
additions.
For outbound
processing, the
system updates
this field with
either after image
(UA) or before
image (UB). The
system updates
the table with UB
only if the
processing option
in the Customer
Master MBF
(P0100042) is
activated.
For outbound
processing, you
can also enter A
for additions and
D for deletions.
Address Number VOAN8 Number 8 A numeric value
that uniquely
identifies a
customer.
The value in this
field must exist
in the F0101 table
or the record will
not process.

A-24 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Company VOCO Alpha 5 A value that
indicates the
company
associated with
the customer. The
company number
is used in line of
business
processing. The
system processes
a record for
company 00000
in addition to
any company
entered for the
customer. If you
leave this field
blank, the system
uses company
00000.
Currency Code - VOCRCA Alpha 3 This field is
A/B Amounts displayed only if
multicurrency is
activated.
A value that
indicates the
currency of the
VOASTY and
VOSPYE fields.
The value
entered in this
field must exist
in the Currency
Code table
(F0013).
If you leave this
field blank, the
value entered in
the processing
option for the
Customer Master
(P03013) is used.
If the processing
option is blank,
the field is
updated with the
currency code
associated with
the company of
the business unit
entered in F0101
table.

A.2.2 Optional Fields Used by the Accounts Receivable System


This table lists fields in the F03012Z1 that are optional and are used by the Accounts
Receivable system. You can use these fields to provide additional information about a
transaction.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-25


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Type - VOTYTN Alpha 2 A value that
Transaction identifies the
type of
transaction. If
you leave this
field blank, the
system uses the
value in the
transaction type
processing option
in the Customer
Master MBF
(P0100042), if set
up.
Direction VODRIN Alpha 1 A number that
Indicator identifies
whether a batch
job is inbound or
outbound
processing.
For inbound
processing, enter
0.
For outbound
processing, leave
this field blank.
The system
updates this field
with 1 if the
record is a
"before image"
and 2 if the
record is an "after
image." A
processing option
in the Customer
Master MBF
(P0100042)
determines
whether a before
image is written
to the table.
This system uses
this field for data
selection for the
batch upload
programs, and
searches for a
value of 0 to
avoid uploading
records that are
for outbound
processing.

A-26 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


EDI - Detail Lines VOEDDL Number 5 A number that
Processed represents the
number of detail
lines included in
a specific
transaction. This
field is
informational
only.
Trading Partner VOPNID Alpha 15 A value used in
ID an Electronic
Data Interchange
(EDI) transaction
to identify who is
trading
documents with
you.
G/L Offset VOARC Alpha 4 A value that, in
conjunction with
the VOCO field,
determines the
A/R trade offset
account to which
the transaction
will be posted.
The account
established in the
AAI PCxxxx
(where xxxx= the
value in the G/L
Offset field) will
be used the post
process.
You do not need
to complete this
field unless you
want to direct
different
transactions to
different offset
accounts.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-27


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Business Unit - VOMCUR Alpha 12 A number that,
A/R Default in conjunction
with the
VOOBAR and
VOAIDR fields,
defines a revenue
account that is
used when you
enter an invoice.
Do not enter a
value in this field
if you complete
the fields for a
model journal
entry (VOCKOR,
VODCAR,
VODTAR). The
revenue account
assigned to the
model journal
entry overrides
the value entered
in this field.
Object - A/R VOOBAR Alpha 6 A number that,
Default in conjunction
with the
VOMCUR and
VOAIDR fields,
defines a default
revenue account
that is used when
you enter an
invoice.
Do not enter a
value in this field
if you complete
the fields for a
model journal
entry (VOCKOR,
VODCAR,
VODTAR). The
revenue account
assigned to the
model journal
entry overrides
the value entered
in this field.

A-28 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Subsidiary - A/R VOAIDR Alpha 8 A number that,
Default in conjunction
with the
VOOBAR field,
defines a default
revenue account
that is used when
you enter an
invoice.
Do not enter a
value in this field
if you complete
the fields for a
model journal
entry (VOCKOR,
VODCAR,
VODTAR). The
revenue account
assigned to the
model journal
entry overrides
the value entered
in this field.
Document VOKCOR Alpha 5 A number that,
Company - A/R in conjunction
Model with the
VODCAR and
VODTAR fields,
defines a default
revenue account
that is used when
you enter an
invoice.
Do not specify a
model journal
entry if you
complete the
fields for a
default revenue
account
(VOMCUR,
VOOBAR,
VOAIDR). The
model journal
entry overrides
the default
revenue account.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-29


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Document VODCAR Alpha 8 A number that,
Number - A/R in conjunction
Model with the
VOKCOR and
VODTAR fields,
defines a default
revenue account
that is used when
you enter an
invoice. The
system does not
validate the
values you enter.
Do not specify a
model journal
entry if you
complete the
fields for a
default revenue
account
(VOMCUR,
VOOBAR,
VOAIDR). The
model journal
entry overrides
the default
revenue account.
Document Type - VODTAR Alpha 2 A number that,
A/R Model in conjunction
with the
VOKCOR and
VODCAR fields,
references a
model journal
entry that is used
when an invoice
is entered. The
system does not
validate the
values you enter.
Do not specify a
model journal
entry if you
complete the
fields for a
default revenue
account
(VOMCUR,
VOOBAR,
VOAIDR). The
model journal
entry overrides
the default
revenue account.

A-30 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Currency Code VOCRCD Alpha 3 This field
displays only if
multicurrency is
activated.
A value that
indicates the
default currency
to use for this
customer when
you enter an
invoice. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in the
F0013 table.
If you leave this
field blank, the
system uses the
currency
associated with
the company
entered on the
invoice.
Tax Rate Area VOTXAI Alpha 10 A value that
indicates the
default tax rate
area used in
invoices for this
customer. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in the
Tax Areas table
(F4008).
Tax Explanation VOEXR1 Alpha 2 A value that
Code indicates the
default tax
explanation code
the system uses
for invoices that
you enter for this
customer. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in
UDC table 00/EX
(Tax Explanation
Codes).

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-31


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Amount - Credit VOACL Number 15 A value that
Limit indicates the
credit limit in a
format that your
database accepts.
Some databases
accept a decimal
identifier. To
update this field,
a credit manager
must set it up
and workflow
processing must
be deactivated.
If workflow
processing is not
deactivated, a
message is sent
to the person
referenced in the
VOCMG field to
approve the
credit limit, and
the system does
not update the
field. Credit limit
approval is
activated in the
workflow
process by
default.
Hold Invoices VOHDAR Alpha 1 A code that
allows you to
hold all invoices
for the customer.
Values are:
Y: Hold invoices.
Do not allow
entry of new
invoices. Sales
orders and
receipts can still
be entered.
N: Do not hold
invoices. Allow
entry of new
invoices.
If you leave this
field blank, the
system uses N.
Payment Terms VOTRAR Alpha 3 A value that
defines the
payment terms
for customer
invoices. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in the
Payment Term
table (F0014).

A-32 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Send Statement VOSTTO Alpha 1 A code that
To indicates the
address to which
statements are
sent. Values are:
C: Customer
P: Parent
1: First Address
Number
2: Second
Address Number
3: Third Address
Number
4: Fourth
Address Number
5: Fifth Address
Number
6: Sixth Address
Number (Special
Factor/Payee)
Payment VORYIN Alpha 1 A code that
Instrument specifies how
payments are
made to the
customer. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in
UDC table 00/PY
(Payment
Instrument).
Print Statement VOSTMT Alpha 1 A code that
(Y/N) indicates
whether the
customer is
eligible to receive
a statement or
invoice. The
default (Y) prints
the invoice or
statement.
Alternate Payor VOARPY Alpha 1 A person or
company other
than the
customer
assigned to the
PYR field. If you
leave this field
blank, the system
updates it with
the customer
number when the
record is
processed. The
value you enter
in this field must
exist in the F0101
table.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-33


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Auto Receipt VOATCS Alpha 1 A code to
(Y/N) indicate whether
receipts from this
customer can be
processed using
auto cash (lock
box). If you leave
this field blank,
the system
updates this field
with Y when the
record is
processed.
Send Invoice To VOSITO Alpha 1 A code that
indicates the
address to which
invoices are sent.
Values are:
C: Customer
P: Parent
1: First Address
Number
2: Second
Address Number
3: Third Address
Number
4: Fourth
Address Number
5: Fifth Address
Number
6: Sixth Address
Number (Special
Factor/Payee)
Statement Cycle VOCYCN Alpha 2 A code that
identifies a
certain time in
which statements
are printed for
customers. You
can also use this
code to indicate a
specific billing
cycle. If you
leave this field
blank, the system
populates it with
the first initial of
the customer's
alpha name
when the record
is processed.

A-34 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Temporary VOTSTA Alpha 2 A code that
Credit Message indicates a
temporary credit
condition for the
customer. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in
UDC table
01/CM (Credit
Messages).
Date of Last VODLC Date 6 The date of the
Credit Review last credit review
for the customer.
Use a format that
your database
accepts. Some
databases allow
you to enter the
date in a
Gregorian date
format (mmddyy
or yymmdd)
while others
might require a
Julian date
format.
The Julian date
format is cyyddd
(where c =
century). Enter 1
for the century to
indicate
transactions in
the 21st century.
For example, the
date 6/1/01
corresponds to a
Julian date
101152. For
6/1/00, the
corresponding
Julian date is
100153 (because
the year 2000 has
a leap day,
2/29/00).
Delinquency VODNLT Alpha 1 A code that
Notice (Y/N) indicates
whether the
customer is
eligible to receive
delinquency
notices. Blank
indicates that the
customer is
eligible to receive
delinquency
notices.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-35


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Person VOPLCR Alpha 10 A code that
Completing Last indicates the
Credit Review person who
completed the
last credit review
for the customer.
The value that
you enter is not
validated against
a table.
Date - Recall for VORVDJ Date 6 A date that
Review represents when
the customer
credit status
should be
reviewed.
Enter the recall
for review date in
a format that
your database
accepts. See the
data item
VODLC for
examples.
Credit Manager VOCMGR Alpha 10 A code that
represents the
credit manager to
whom workflow
messages are
sent.
To receive
workflow
messages, an
address book
record for the
credit manager
must exist in the
F0101 table, and
the designation
that you enter in
this field must
exist in UDC
table 01/CR with
the address book
number assigned
to the
Description 2
field.

A-36 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Collection VOCLMG Alpha 10 A code that
Manager represents the
collection
manager to
whom workflow
messages are
sent.
To receive
workflow
messages, an
address book
record for the
collection
manager must
exist in the F0101
table and the
designation that
you enter in this
field must exist
in UDC table
01/CR with the
address book
number assigned
to the
Description 2
field
Collection Report VOCOLL Alpha 1 A code that
(Y/N) indicates
whether the
customer address
book number is
eligible to be
printed on the
Collection
Report. If you
leave this field
blank, the system
updates it with Y
when the record
is processed.
Apply Finance VOAFC Alpha 1 A code that
Charges (Y/N) indicates
whether the
customer is
eligible for
delinquency fees.
If you enter N in
this field, the
customer is
bypassed during
fee processing. If
you leave this
field blank, the
system updates it
with N when the
record is
processed.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-37


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Last Statement VODT1J Date 6 The date when
Date the last statement
was processed.
The system
displays this
information from
the A/R
Statistical
Summary table
(F03B16S).
First Invoice Date VODFIJ Date 6 The date when
the first invoice
was entered into
the system. Use a
format that your
database accepts.
See the data item
VODLC for
examples.
Alternatively,
leave this field
blank and run
the Statistical
History Refresh
program
(R03B16A) to
update it.
Last Invoice Date VODLIJ Date 6 The date when
the last invoice
was entered into
the system. Use a
format that your
database accepts.
See the data item
VODLC for
examples.
Alternatively,
leave this field
blank and run
the Statistical
History Refresh
program.
Date Last Paid VODLP Date 6 The date of the
last receipt. Use a
format that your
database accepts.
See the data item
VODLC for
examples.
Alternatively,
leave this field
blank and run
the Statistical
History Refresh
program to
update it.

A-38 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Dun & Bradstreet VODB Alpha 3 A value that
Rating represents the
credit rating
assigned by Dun
& Bradstreet.
Dun & Bradstreet VODNBJ Date 6 The date that the
Date Dun & Bradstreet
ratings were
available. Use a
format that your
database accepts.
See the data item
VODLC for
examples.
TRW Rating VOTRW Alpha 3 A value that
stores the credit
rating assigned
by TRW
(Experian).
TRW Date VOTWDJ Date 6 The date that the
TRW ratings
were available.
Use a format that
your database
accepts. See the
data item
VODLC for
examples.
Amount Due VOAD Number 15 Reserved for
future use.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-39


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Amount - Prior VOAFCP Number 15 The finance
Year Finance charges for the
Charge current and prior
years. Use a
format that your
database accepts.
Some databases
accept a decimal
identifier while
others do not.
If you use
multicurrency,
the amounts
entered must be
in the currency
that corresponds
to the Currency
Code A/B
Amounts field
(VOCRCA) in the
Customer Master
Information
program
(P03013).
Alternatively,
leave these fields
blank and run
the Statistical
History Refresh
program to
update them.

A-40 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Amount - YTD VOAFCY Number 15 A number that
Finance Charges indicates the
finance charges
for the current
and prior years.
Use a format that
your database
accepts. Some
databases accept
a decimal
identifier while
others do not.
If you use
multicurrency,
the amounts
entered must be
in the currency
that corresponds
to Currency Code
A/B Amounts
field (VOCRCA)
in the Customer
Master
Information
program.
Alternatively,
leave these fields
blank and run
the Statistical
History Refresh
program to
update them.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-41


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Amount Invoiced VOASTY Number 15 A number that
This Year indicates the
amount invoiced
for the current
and prior years.
Use a format that
your database
accepts. Some
databases accept
a decimal
identifier while
others do not.
If you use
multicurrency,
the amounts
entered must be
in the currency
that corresponds
to the Currency
Code A/B
Amounts field
(VOCRCA) in the
P03013 program.
Alternatively,
leave these fields
blank and run
the Statistical
History Update
program to
update them.
Amount Invoiced VOSPYE Number 15 A number that
indicates the
amount invoiced
for the current
and prior years.
Use a format that
your database
accepts. Some
databases accept
a decimal
identifier while
others do not.
If you are using
multicurrency,
the amounts
entered must be
represented in
the currency
corresponding to
the value entered
in the Currency
Code A/B
Amounts field
(VOCRCA).
The system
updates this field
only when you
run the Statistics
Annual Close
program
(R03B161).

A-42 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Amount Last VOALP Number 15 A number that
Applied indicates the
amount of the
last payment
received from
this customer.
Use a format that
your database
accepts. Some
databases accept
a decimal
identifier while
others do not.
Alternatively,
leave this field
blank and run
the Statistical
History Refresh
program to
update it.
Person Opening VOPOPN Alpha 10 The User ID of
Account the person
opening the
account. The
system supplies
the User ID.
Date - Account VODAOJ Date 6 The date when
Opened the customer
record was
entered into the
system. Use a
format that your
database accepts.
See the data item
VODLC for
examples. If you
leave this field
blank, the system
updates it with
the date when
the record was
processed.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-43


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Policy Number VOPLY Number 5 An internal code
(Internal) representing an
Accounts
Receivable
delinquency
policy. This field
is updated when
the policy name
is entered on the
Customer Master
Information
form. If you have
established
policies, you can
update this field
with the policy
ID number
(RFPLY)
associated with
the policy name
stored in the A/R
Delinquency
Policy table
(F03B25). A value
that you enter in
this field is
validated against
an entry in the
table.
Deduction VOMAN8 Alpha 1 The address book
Manager number of the
person who is
responsible for
deductions. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in the
F0101 table.
Auto Receipts VOARL Alpha 10 A value that you
Execution List represents a list
of algorithms
used in auto
receipt
processing to
match receipts to
invoices in a
specific order.
The value that
you enter in this
field must exist
in the Receipt
Application
Algorithm
Execution Lists
table (F03B50).

A-44 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Address Book VOAC01 through Alpha 3 A code that is
Category Codes VOAC30 defined in the
01 through 30 Address Book
system and used
in the Accounts
Receivable
system for
reporting. The
value that you
enter in one of
these fields must
exist in the
corresponding
UDC table 01/01
- 01/30 (Address
Book Category
Codes).
The values that
you enter in the
category codes
for the Address
Book Master
(ABAC01 -
ABAC30) are not
updated in these
fields.
Customer Status VOCUSTS Number 1 This field
indicates the
customer status
for CRM
purposes. Enter
value 0 to set
status as Active.
Enter value 1 to
set status as
Inactive.

A.2.3 Optional Fields Used by the Sales Order Management System


These fields are optional in the F03012Z1 table and are used by the Sales Order
Management system. You can use these fields to provide additional information about
a transaction.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-45


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


ABC Code Sales VOABC1 Alpha 1 A grade that
represents the
level of sales
activity for a
customer or for
inventory items.
This field
indicates the use
of the 80/20
principle (80
percent of the
significant results
are attributable to
20 percent of the
business effort).
The possible
grades are A
(best) to F
(worst).
You can leave
this field blank
and run the ABC
Analysis
program (R4164),
which assigns the
code.

A-46 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


ABC Code VOABC2 Alpha 1 A code that
Inventory represents an
item's ranking by
average
investment.
Values are:
A: Assign this
item to the first
amount ranking.
B: Assign this
item to the
second amount
ranking.
C: Assign this
item to the third
amount ranking
D: Skip this item
in the ABC
Analysis.
You can leave
this field blank
and run the ABC
Analysis
program, which
assigns the code
based on an
item's value as
follows:
Total Item
Average
Investment
divided by
Business Unit
Average
Investment
equals the Item's
Calculated Value
Total

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-47


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


ABC Code VOABC3 Alpha 1 A code that
Average Days represents the
average number
of days that a
customer takes to
pay an invoice.
This field
indicates the
system is using
the 80/20
principle (80
percent of the
significant results
are attributable to
20 percent of the
business effort).
The possible
grades are A
(best) to F
(worst).
You can leave
this field blank
and run the ABC
Analysis
program, which
assigns the code.
Open Order VOAPRC Number 15 A number that
Amount represents the
total amount of
open orders for
this customer.
Use a format that
your database
accepts. Some
databases accept
a decimal
identifier while
others do not.
Maximum Order VOMAXO Number 15 A number that
Value represents the
largest order that
can be entered. If
the amount of the
order is greater
than the number
entered in this
field, the system
will return an
error.
Minimum Order VOMINO Number 15 A number that
Value represents the
lowest amount of
an order that can
be entered. If the
amount of the
order is smaller
than the amount
entered in this
field, an error is
returned.

A-48 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Orders Year To VOOYTD Number 3 The number of
Date orders for the
current year.
Orders Prior Year VOOPY Number 3 The number of
orders for the
prior year.
Related Address VOAN8R Number 8 A value that
Number connects a
ship-to address
to a sold-to
address, or the
opposite. For
example, if you
enter only a
ship-to address
in sales order
entry, the system
uses this field to
determine which
address number
to select from the
list of related
address numbers,
which is the
value in the
Sold-To field.
The values for
this field are 1
through 7. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in
UDC table
40/RA (Related
Address
Number).
Billing Address VOBADT Alpha 1 A code that
Type directs the
system to use this
address as a
sold-to address, a
ship-to address,
or both. Values
are:
X: Indicates a
bill-to and a
ship-to address.
S: Indicates only
a ship-to address.
B: Indicates only
a bill-to address
The value that
you enter in this
field must exist
in UDC table
H42/BA (Billing
Address Type).

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-49


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Customer Price VOCPGP Alpha 8 A code that
Group identifies a group
of customers. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in
UDC table 40/PC
(Customer Price
Groups).
Order Template VOORTP Alpha 8 A code that
identifies a list of
items that are
most frequently
ordered. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in
UDC table
40/OT (Order
Templates).
Trade Discount VOTRDC Number 7 A number that
represents the
percentage by
which the system
reduces the price
of each item. This
percentage is the
only discount
that will be
applied. You can
override the
discount
percentage if you
enter a price.
Enter the
percentage as a
whole number
(for example, 5
for 5 percent).
Print Message VOINMG Alpha 10 A code that is
assigned to a
message that
prints on the
purchase order.
The value that
you enter in this
field must exist
in UDC table
40/PM (Print
Message).

A-50 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Credit Hold VOEXHD Alpha 1 A code that
Exempt indicates
whether the
customer is
exempt from
credit checking in
the sales order
processing cycle.
Values are:
Y: This customer
is exempt from
credit checking.
N: This customer
is not exempt
from credit
checking. If
credit checking is
activated in the
Sales Order Entry
processing
options and the
customer exceeds
the limit, the
order is placed
on hold.
Hold Orders VOHOLD Alpha 2 A code that
Code describes the
reason why an
order is on hold.
The value that
you enter in this
field must exist
in UDC table
42/HC (Hold
Codes).

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-51


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Route Code VOROUT Alpha 3 A code that
represents the
delivery route for
the customer.
This field is one
of several fields
used by the
freight summary
facility to
calculate
potential freight
charges for an
order.
For picking, use
the route code
with the stop and
zone codes to
group all of the
items that are to
be loaded onto a
delivery vehicle
for a specific
route.
The value that
you enter in this
field must exist
in UDC table
42/RT (Route
Code).
You set up the
default for this
field on the
Customer Billing
Instructions
form.

A-52 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Stop Code VOSTOP Alpha 3 A code that
represents the
stop on a
delivery route.
This field is one
of several fields
used by the
freight summary
facility to
calculate
potential freight
charges for an
order.
For picking, use
the stop code
with the route
and zone codes
to group all of
the items that are
to be loaded onto
a delivery vehicle
for a specific
route.
The value in this
field must exist
in UDC table
42/SP (Stop
Code).
You set up the
default for this
field on the
Customer Billing
Instructions
form.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-53


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Zone Number VOZON Alpha 3 A code that
represents the
delivery area
where the
customer is
located. This field
is one of several
fields used by
freight summary
facility to
calculate
potential freight
charges for an
order.
For picking, use
the zone code
with the route
and stop codes to
group all items
that are to be
loaded on to a
delivery vehicle
for a specific
route.
The value that
you enter in this
field must exist
in the UDC table
40/ZN (Zone
Number).
You set up the
default for this
field on the
Customer Billing
Instructions
form.
Carrier Number VOCARS Number 8 A value that
represents the
address book
number of the
carrier specified
by the customer
or your
organization. Use
this field for
route and special
handling
requirements.
The value in this
field must exist
in the F0101
table.
Delivery VODEL1 Alpha 30 Use this field to
Instructions Line enter delivery
1 instructions.
Delivery VODEL2 Alpha 30 Use this field to
Instructions Line enter delivery
2 instructions.

A-54 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Transit Days VOLTDT Number 5 A value that
represents the
number of days
that goods are in
transit. When
you enter a
number in this
field, the Sales
Order Detail
program (P4210)
subtracts the
number from the
promised
delivery date to
calculate a pick
release date.
Freight Handling VOFRTH Alpha 5 A code that
code designates the
method for a
customer to
receive
shipments. You
can use this code
to indicate who
has responsibility
for freight
charges. The
value you enter
in this field must
exist in UDC
table 42/FR
(Freight
Handling Code).
Apply Freight VOAFT Alpha 1 A code that
(Y/N) indicates
whether the
system performs
freight
calculations
during
processing.
Values are:
Y: The system
performs freight
calculations
during
processing.
N: The system
does not perform
freight
calculations
during
processing.
If you leave this
field blank, the
system updates it
with Y when the
record is
processed.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-55


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Partial Line VOAPTS Alpha 1 A code that
Shipments indicates
Allowed (Y/N) whether the
customer
requires that the
entire line be
shipped at one
time or whether
the customer
accepts multiple
partial shipments
instead. Values
are:
Y: The customer
requires full
shipments.
N: The customer
permits partial
shipments.
If you leave this
field blank, the
system updates it
to Y when the
record is
processed.
Substitutes VOSBAL Alpha 1 A code that
Allowed (Y/N) indicates
whether the
customer accepts
substitute items.
Values are:
Y: The customer
accepts substitute
items.
N: The customer
does not accept
substitute items
If you leave this
field blank, the
system updates it
to Y when the
record is
processed.

A-56 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Backorders VOBACK Alpha 1 A code that
Allowed (Y/N) indicates
whether the
customer allows
backorders for
this item. You can
allow backorders
by item using the
Item Master
(P4101) or Item
Branch/Plant
(P41012)
program, or by
customer using
the Customer
Billing
Instructions
program
(P03013), or by
branch/plant
using the
Branch/Plant
Constants
program
(P41001). Values
are:
Y: Allow
backorders for
this item
N: Do not allow
backorders for
this item
regardless of the
backorders code
assigned to the
customer.
Customer PO VOPORQ Alpha 1 A code that
Required (Y/N) indicates
whether a
purchase order is
required for the
customer. Values
are:
Y: A customer
purchase order
number is
required.
N: A customer
purchase order
number is not
required.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-57


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Priority VOPRIO Alpha 1 A code that
Processing prioritizes orders
for a customer.
This value
determines the
priorities for
printing pick
slips. In addition,
the Backorders to
Fill report
(R42118) can be
sequenced by
this code to
release orders
with the highest
priority first.
The value that
you enter in this
field must exist
in UDC table
H40/PR (Priority
Processing
Code).

A-58 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Credit Check VOARTO Alpha 1 A code that
Level controls how the
system performs
credit checking.
Values are:
P: The credit
check is based on
the customer's
parent number
C: The credit
check is based on
the customer
number only.
S: The credit
check is based on
the customer
number only.
If you use
method P, the
system compares
the open
accounts
receivable and
open sales orders
for the sum of the
children and the
parent against
the credit limit
for the parent
number. For
example, you can
use method P
when a customer
with multiple
offices or
branches
requests that all
credit checking
be reflected in a
single account.
Note: Even
though credit
checking can be
conducted at the
parent or
customer number
level, all accounts
receivable
transactions are
posted to the
Customer
Number field
(SDAN8) when
you run the Sales
Update program
(R42800).
Invoice Copies VOINVC Number 2 The number of
invoice copies to
print.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-59


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Invoice VOICON Alpha 1 A code that
Consolidation indicates
whether to
consolidate
invoices for a
customer. Values
are:
Y: The system
generates a single
invoice from
multiple sales
orders.
Blank: The
system updates
this field with N
when the record
is processed.
Billing Frequency BOBLFR Alpha 1 A code that
defines the
billing frequency
to use when
determining how
often to run
invoices. Values
are:
M: Monthly
W: Weekly
D: Daily
The value that
you enter in this
field must exist
in UDC table
H42/BL (Billing
Frequency).
However, the
system
recognizes only
the values listed
above.
Next Invoice VONIVD Date 6 A date that
Date indicates the next
time invoices will
be printed for the
customer. Use a
format that your
database accepts.
See the date item
VODLC for
examples.
This field is used
in conjunction
with the
VOBLFR field to
determine how
often and when
invoices are
printed.

A-60 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


License VOLEDJ Date 6 The date a license
Expiration Date expires.
Price Pick List VOPLST Alpha 1 A code that
(Y/N) indicates
whether price
information
appears on the
customer pick
list, purchase
order, or sales
order. If you
leave this field
blank, the system
updates it with Y
when the record
is processed.
Merge Orders VOMORD Alpha 1 A code that
(Y/N) prevents a
customer order
from being
shipped together
and merged by
the Warehouse
Management
system.
Pallet Control VOPALC Alpha 1 A code that
identifies
customers who
allow the
shipment of
pallets. Values
are:
Y or 1: Customer
allows the
shipment of
pallets
N or 0: the
customer does
not allow the
shipment of
pallets.
Unit of Measure - VOVUMD Alpha 2 A code that
Volume Display identifies the unit
of measure to
display for the
volume of an
order. The value
that you enter in
this field must
exist in UDC
table 00/UM
(Unit of
Measure). If you
leave this field
blank, the system
updates it with
the value in the
Inventory
Constants table
(F41001).

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-61


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Unit of Measure - VOWUMD Alpha 2 A code that
Weight Display identifies the unit
of measure to
display for the
weight of an
order. The value
that you enter in
this field must
exist in UDC
table 00/UM
(Unit of
Measure). If you
leave this field
blank, the system
updates it with
the value in the
F41001 table.
Batch Processing VOEDPM Alpha 1 A code that
Mode indicates
whether the
customer is
prohibited from
batch processing
or whether the
customer is in a
test or
production
mode. Values are:
I: Inhibited. The
customer is not
available for
batch processing
T: Test mode.
Only reports are
produced when
the record is
processed.
P: Production
mode. Reports
and orders are
produced when
the record is
processed
Item Type VOEDII Alpha 1 A code that
Identifier specifies the type
of item number
to be sent in an
Electronic Data
Interchange
transaction (for
example, UPC
code or supplier
part number).
The value that
you enter in this
field must exist
in UDC table
40/II (Item Type
Identifier).

A-62 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Customer Type VOEDCI Alpha 1 A code that
Identifier specifies the type
of number to be
sent in an EDI
transaction (for
example, a
DUNS or
telephone
number). The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in
UDC table 40/CI
(Customer Type
Identifier).
Quantity VOEDQD Number 1 The number of
Decimals positions to the
right of the
decimal point
that is used for
all quantity fields
in an EDI
transaction for
this customer.
Amount VOEDAD Number 1 The number of
Decimals positions to the
right of the
decimal point
that is used for
all amount fields
in an EDI
transaction for
this customer.
Delivery Note VOEDF1 Alpha 1 A code that
indicates
whether the
system prints
delivery notes for
a customer. If
you leave this
field blank, the
system updates it
with N when the
record is
processed.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-63


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Item Restrictions VOEDF2 Alpha 2 A code that
designates
whether
restrictions are
placed on
ordering items
from this
supplier. Values
are:
I: An item may
only be
purchased if it is
set up on the
Item Restrictions
form.
E: An item may
not be purchased
when it is set up
on the Item
Restrictions form.

A-64 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Partial Order VOSI01 Alpha 1 A code that
Shipments indicates
Allowed (Y/N) whether the
customer
requires that the
entire order be
shipped at one
time or whether
the customer
accepts multiple
partial
shipments.
If you leave this
field blank, the
system updates it
with Y when the
record is
processed.
Note: Partial
order shipments
allowed is
activated only
when adding
orders in the
Sales Order Entry
program (P4210)
with availability
checking
activated, since
this program is
the only place
that all lines can
be grouped
together as an
order.
Availability
checking
performed at
pick slips or
shipment
confirmation
does not
guarantee that all
lines are together
for the order.
COA Print (Y/N) VOSI02 Alpha 1 A code that
indicates the
certificate of
analysis.
Special VOSI03 Alpha 10 Reserved for
Instruction 03 future use.
Special VOSI04 Alpha 10 Reserved for
Instruction 04 future use.
Special VOSI05 Alpha 10 Reserved for
Instruction 05 future use.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-65


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Sales Price Based VOCP01 Alpha 1 A value that
on Date indicates how the
system
determines the
Price Effective
Date in the Sales
Order Header
File (F4201) and
Sales Order
Detail File
(F4211). In Sales
Order
Management, the
system uses the
Price Effective
Date field (PEFJ)
to retrieve the
base price from
the Item Base
Price table
(F4106) and the
price adjustments
from the Price
Adjustment
Detail table
(F4072).

A-66 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Price and VOASN Alpha 8 A code that
Adjustment identifies a price
Schedule and adjustment
schedule. A price
and adjustment
schedule contains
one or more
adjustment types
for which a
customer or an
item might be
eligible. The
system applies
the adjustments
in the sequence
that you specify
in the schedule.
You connect
customers to a
price and
adjustment
schedule through
the customer
billing
instructions.
When you enter a
sales order, the
system copies the
schedule that is
attached to the
sold to address in
the order header.
You can override
the schedule at
the detail line
level.
For the
Agreement
Management
system, this is the
Agreement
Penalty Schedule.
The information
in the schedule
provides the
system with the
criteria for an
agreement to
have penalty
conditions.
The value that
you enter in this
field must exist
in UDC table
40/AS
(Adjustment
Schedule).

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-67


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Price Adjustment VODSPA Alpha 1 A code that
on Invoice (Y/N) identifies
whether the
system should
print the price
adjustment
details on the
sales invoice.
This field is
active only if you
use the
Advanced Price
Adjustment
system.
Program Name - VOSLPG Alpha 10 The name of the
Shipping Labels program that is
used to print
shipping labels
for a customer.
Version Name - VOSLDW Alpha 10 The version of
Shipping Label the program used
Program to print shipping
labels for a
customer.
Configuration VOCFPP Alpha 18 The default pick
Pick and Pack and pack
configuration
required by a
customer.
Configuration VOCFSP Alpha 18 The default
Standard Carton configuration for
Pack standard carton
pack required by
a customer.
Default VOCFDF Alpha 1 The default
Configuration configuration for
carton pack
required by a
customer. Values
are:
1: Pick and pack
configuration
2: Standard
carton
configuration
Blank: UCC-128
processing is not
performed for
this customer

A-68 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Requires VORQ01 Alpha 1 A value that
Packaging Code indicates
whether a
packaging code
is required for a
customer. Values
are:
1: A packaging
code is required
for this customer.
Blank: A
packaging code
is not required
Requires Weight VORQ02 Alpha 1 A value that
Code indicates
whether a weight
code is required
for a customer.
Values are:
1: A weight code
is required for
this customer.
Blank: a weight
code is not
required
Requires VORQ03 Alpha 1 A value that
Identification indicates
Code 1 whether an
identification
code is required
for a customer.
Values are:
1: An
identification
code is required
for this customer.
If you enter 1 in
this field, you
must also enter a
value in the
CODR03 field.
Blank: An
identification
code is not
required.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-69


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Requires VORQ04 Alpha 1 A value that
Identification indicates
Code 2 whether an
identification
code is required
for a customer.
Values are:
1: An
identification
code is required
for this customer.
If you enter 1 in
this field, you
must also enter a
value in the
CODR04 field.
Blank: An
identification
code is not
required.
Requires VORQ05 Alpha 1 A value that
Transportation indicates
Method whether a
transportation
method is
required for a
customer. Values
are:
1: A
transportation
method is
required for this
customer.
Blank: A
transportation
method is not
required.
Requires Routing VORQ06 Alpha 1 A value that
indicates
whether a
routing
description is
required for a
customer. Values
are:
1: A routing
description is
required for this
customer.
Blank: A routing
code is not
required

A-70 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Requires VORQ07 Alpha 1 A value that
Equipment indicates
whether an
equipment code
is required for a
customer. Values
are:
1: An equipment
code is required
for this customer.
Blank: An
equipment code
is not required.
Requires VORQ08 Alpha 1 A value that
Reference indicates
Number 1 whether a
reference number
is required for a
customer. Values
are:
1: A reference
number is
required for this
customer. If you
enter 1 in this
field, you must
also complete the
VODR08 field
with a valid
value.
Blank: A
reference number
is not required.
Requires VORQ09 Alpha 1 A value that
Reference indicates
Number 2 whether a
reference number
is required for a
customer. Values
are:
1: A reference
number is
required for this
customer. If you
enter 1 in this
field, you must
also enter a value
in the VODR09
field.
Blank: A
reference number
is not required.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-71


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Default VODR03 Alpha 2 The value in the
Identification default
Code Qualifier 1 Identification
Code Qualifier
that is used for
this customer.
The code is used
in the Inventory
Management
system. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in
UDC table 41/X6
(X12 Reference
Number
Qualifier).
Default VODR04 Alpha 2 The value in the
Identification default
Code Qualifier 2 Identification
Code Qualifier
that is used for
this customer.
The code is used
in the Inventory
Management
system. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in
UDC table 41/X6
(X12 Reference
Number
Qualifier).
Default VODR08 Alpha 2 The value in the
Reference default Reference
Number Number
Qualifier 1 Qualifier that is
used for this
customer. The
code is used in
the Inventory
Management
system. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in
UDC table 41/X6
(X12 Reference
Number
Qualifier).

A-72 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Default VODR09 Alpha 2 The value in the
Identification default Reference
Code Qualifier 2 Number
Qualifier that is
used for this
customer. The
code is used in
the Inventory
Management
system. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in
UDC table 41/X6
(X12 Reference
Number
Qualifier).

A.2.4 Ignored Fields


This table lists fields in the F03012Z1 table that are ignored. Leave these fields blank.
The system does not use the values in these fields.

Field Name Alias Type Length


Transaction VOTORG Alpha 10
Originator
User ID VOUSER Alpha 10
Program ID VOPID Alpha 10
Work Station ID VOJOBN Alpha 10
Time Last Updated VOUPMT Number 6
Date Updated VOUPMJ Date 6
Time of Day VOTDAY Date 6
EDI - Document Type VOEDCT Alpha 2
EDI -Translation VOEDFT Alpha 10
Format
EDI - Transmission VOEDDT Date 6
Date
Ledger Inquiry VOSQNL Alpha 1
Sequence
Auto Receipt VOALGM Alpha 2
Algorithm
Balance Forward/ VOBO Alpha 1
Open Item
Credit Check VOCKHC Alpha 1
Handling Code
Days Sales VODSO Number 5
Outstanding
Dunning Letters Sent VODLQT Number 3
Date of Last Dunning VODLQJ Date 6
Letter

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-73


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length


Number of Reminders VONBRR Alpha 1
to Send
Number of Sent VONBR1 Number 3
Reminders - 1
Number of Sent VONBR2 Number 3
Reminders - 2
Number of Sent VONBR3 Number 3
Reminders - 3
Finance Charge Days VOFD Number 3
Finance Charge - VOCFCE Alpha 1
Create Entries Y/N
Pending Cash VOAB2 Alpha 1
Receipts
Date - Financial VOFNDJ Date 6
Statements on Hand
Average Days Late VOAVD Number 3
Amount of High VOAHB Number 15
Balance
Send Method VOCRMD Alpha 1
Amount of High VOAHB Number 15
Balance
Administration Credit VOAMCR Number 15
Limit

A.2.5 Additional Fields for CRM


This table lists additional fields that are used by the CRM system. If you are using
CRM, you can populate these fields.

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Tier 1 VOTIER1 String 45 Enter a value from user-defined code
table 01/T1 to specify the number of the
tier associated with the customer. This
number represent a subjective ranking
of customer value.
Override Sales VOSTOF Character 1 Select this option if you do not want the
Team system to automatically assign sales
Assignment team members to the customer based on
the industry grouping and territory. If
you select this option, you must
manually assign sales team members to
the customer. If you do not select this
option, the system assigns all of the sales
team members who are active in both
the territory and industry grouping
associated with the customer when the
customer record is added or changed.

A-74 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Territory ID VOTERRID Numeric 15 Enter the area in which the customer
resides. The system uses this field, in
conjunction with the Customer Industry
Group field to determine which sales
team members to add to the customer's
sales team. For a sales team member to
be automatically assigned to a customer,
the sales team member must be active in
both the Territory and the Industry
Grouping associated with the customer
record. If you have selected the Override
Sales Team Assignment option, this field
is informational only, and is not used to
assign sales team members to the
customer.
Customer VOCIG Numeric 15 Enter the industry with which the
Industry Group customer is associated. The system uses
this field, in conjunction with the
Territory ID field to determine which
sales team members to add to the
customer's sales team. For a sales team
member to be automatically assigned to
a customer, the sales team member must
be active in both the Territory and the
Industry Grouping associated with the
customer record. If you have selected
the Override Sales Team Assignment
option, this field is informational only.

A.2.6 User- Reserved Fields


This table lists fields in the F03012Z1 table that are reserved for users. These fields are
not updated by any JD Edwards EnterpriseOne program. The Address Book, Accounts
Receivable, and Sales Order Management systems do not display them on any forms.

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Amount - VOABAM Number 15 A user-defined
Address Book amount field.
Use a format that
your database
accepts.
Amount - VOABA1 Number 15 A user-defined
Address Book amount field.
Use a format that
your database
accepts.
User Reserved VOURCD Alpha 3 A code that is
Code user-defined. You
can use any
alphanumeric
value up to three
characters.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-75


Mapping Fields in the Supplier Master - Batch Table (F0401Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


User Reserved VOURDT Date 6 A value for a
Date date. Use a
format that your
database accepts.
See the data item
VOEBDT for
more
information.
User Reserved VOURAT Number 15 A user-defined
Amount amount field.
Use a format that
your database
accepts.
User Reserved VOURAB Number 8 A user-defined
Number numeric field
that can contain
up to eight digits.
User Reserved VOURRF Alpha 15 A user-defined
Reference alphanumeric
field that can
contain up to 15
characters.

A.3 Mapping Fields in the Supplier Master - Batch Table (F0401Z1)


This section contains a list of the fields in the F0401Z1 table. Some of the fields are
required to run the Supplier Master Batch Upload program (R04010Z), while others
are not. Not all fields are displayed or used by the Address Book, Accounts Payable, or
Procurement system.

A.3.1 Required Fields


This table lists fields that are required in the F0401Z1. For some fields, blank is a valid
value.

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


EDI - User ID VOEDUS Alpha 10 A user-defined
identification
number. Enter
the user ID of the
person who runs
the Supplier
Master Batch
Upload program
or the person
who is to receive
workflow
messages. This
field, in
conjunction with
the VOEDTN
and VOEDBT
fields, uniquely
identifies a
specific
transaction.

A-76 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Supplier Master - Batch Table (F0401Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


EDI - Batch VOEDBT Alpha 15 A number the
Number person who runs
the Supplier
Master Batch
Upload program
assigns to each
batch. The
system assigns a
new batch
number
whenever this
field changes.
You can
significantly
increase
performance by
assigning one
batch number for
each group of
transactions you
process.
EDI - Transaction VOEDTN Alpha 22 A number that
Number identifies each
transaction. A
new transaction
number indicates
a different
address book
record. You
cannot have
more than one
transaction with
the same number
in a batch.
Typically, this
field contains the
document
number of the
source system
number so that
the sender can
readily identify
the transaction.
EDI - Line VOEDLN Number 7 A number that
Number uniquely
identifies a
transaction. Each
transaction can
have multiple,
consecutive lines.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-77


Mapping Fields in the Supplier Master - Batch Table (F0401Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


EDI - VOEDSP Alpha 1 A value that
Successfully indicates
Processed whether a
transaction
successfully
processed. Leave
this field blank.
The value N
indicates that the
transaction was
not processed or
was processed in
error.
The system
changes the
value to Y after
the transaction is
successfully
processed.
Transaction VOTNAC Alpha 2 If you are
Action processing new
transactions,
enter A in this
field. If you are
processing a
change for an
existing record,
enter C. If you
are processing a
deletion for an
existing record,
enter D. Process
all changes and
deletions after
additions.
For outbound
processing, the
system updates
this field with
either after image
(UA) or before
image (UB). The
system updates
the table with UB
only if the
processing option
in the Supplier
Master MBF
(P00400047) is
activated.
For outbound
processing, you
can also enter A
for additions and
D for deletions.

A-78 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Supplier Master - Batch Table (F0401Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Address Number VOAN8 Number 8 A number that
uniquely
identifies the
supplier. The
value in this field
must exist in the
F0101 table, or
the system does
not process the
record.
Currency Code - VOCRCA Alpha 3 This field
A/B Amounts displays only if
multicurrency is
activated.
An alphabetic
code that
represents the
address book
currency. The
value that you
enter in this field
indicates the
currency of the
VOAYPD and
OAPPD fields.
The value you
enter in this field
must exist in the
Currency Code
table (F0013).
If you leave this
field blank, the
system uses the
value entered in
the processing
option for the
Supplier Master
program
(P04012). If the
processing option
is blank, the
system updates
the field with the
currency code of
the company of
the business unit
in the F0101
table.

A.3.2 Optional Fields Used by the Accounts Payable System


This table lists fields in the F0401Z1 table that are optional and are used by the
Accounts Payable system. You can use these fields to provide additional information
about a transaction.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-79


Mapping Fields in the Supplier Master - Batch Table (F0401Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Type - VOTYTN Alpha 2 A value that
Transaction identifies the
type of
transaction. If
you leave this
field blank, the
system uses the
value in the
transaction type
processing option
in the Supplier
Master MBF
(P0400047), if set
up.
This field is
required if you
use outbound
processing.
Direction VODRIN Alpha 1 A value that
Indicator specifies whether
the transaction is
inbound or
outbound. Values
are:
Blank: Inbound
2: Outbound
EDI - Detail Lines VOEDDL Number 5 The number of
Processed detail lines
included in a
specific
transaction. This
field is
informational
only.
Trading Partner VOPNID Alpha 15 A value used in
ID an Electronic
Data Interchange
(EDI) transaction
to identify who is
trading
documents with
you.

A-80 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Supplier Master - Batch Table (F0401Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


G/L Offset VOAPC Alpha 4 A value that, in
conjunction with
the company
number,
determines the
accounts payable
trade (offset)
account to which
the transaction
will post. The
account
established in the
AAI item PCxxxx
(where xxxx= the
value in the G/L
Offset field) will
be used in the
post process. The
AAI can be
established for
each company or
for the default
company 00000.
The value in this
field becomes the
default for all
vouchers entered
for the supplier.
Do not complete
this field unless
you want to
direct
transactions to
offset accounts
other than those
specified in the
AAI item PC.
Business Unit - VOMCUP Alpha 12 A value that, in
A/P Default conjunction with
the VOOBAP and
VOAIDP fields,
specifies a
default expense
account that is
automatically
supplied on the
G/L Distribution
form when you
enter a voucher.
Do not specify a
default expense
account if you
complete the
fields for a model
journal entry
(VOCKOP,
VODCAP,
VODTAP). The
model journal
entry overrides
the default
expense account.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-81


Mapping Fields in the Supplier Master - Batch Table (F0401Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Object - A/P VOOBAP Alpha 6 A value that, in
Default conjunction with
the VOMCUP
and VOAIDP
fields, specifies a
default expense
account that is
automatically
supplied on the
G/L Distribution
form when you
enter a voucher.
Do not specify a
default expense
account if you
complete the
fields for a model
journal entry
(VOCKOP,
VODCAP,
VODTAP). The
model journal
entry overrides
the default
expense account.
Subsidiary - A/P VOAIDP Alpha 8 A value that, in
Default conjunction with
the VOMCUP
and VOOBAP
fields, specifies a
default expense
account that is
automatically
supplied on the
G/L Distribution
form when you
enter a voucher.
Do not specify a
default expense
account if you
complete the
fields for a model
journal entry
(VOCKOP,
VODCAP,
VODTAP). The
model journal
entry overrides
the default
expense account.

A-82 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Supplier Master - Batch Table (F0401Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Document VOKCOP Alpha 5 A value that, in
Company - A/P conjunction with
Model the VODCAP
and VODTAP
fields, specifies a
model journal
entry in the
Account Ledger
table (F0911). The
values are not
validated.
If you enter a
valid model
journal entry, the
account you
specified is used
in the G/L
Distribution form
when you enter a
voucher.
Do not specify a
model journal
entry if you
complete the
fields for a
default expense
account
(VOMCUP,
VOOBAP,
VOAIDP). The
model journal
entry overrides
the default
expense account.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-83


Mapping Fields in the Supplier Master - Batch Table (F0401Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Document VODCAP Number 8 A value that, in
Number - A/P conjunction with
Model the VOKCOP
and VODTAP
fields, specifies a
model journal
entry in the F0911
table. If you enter
a valid model
journal entry, the
account specified
is used in the
G/L Distribution
form when you
enter a voucher.
Do not specify a
model journal
entry if you
complete the
fields for a
default expense
account
(VOMCUP,
VOOBAP,
VOAIDP). The
model journal
entry overrides
the default
expense account.
Document Type - VODTAP Alpha 2 A value that, in
A/P Model conjunction with
the VOKCOP
and VODCAP
fields, specifies a
model journal
entry in F0911
table. The values
that you enter are
not validated.
If you enter a
valid model
journal entry, the
account specified
is used in the
G/L Distribution
form when you
enter a voucher.
Do not specify a
model journal
entry if you
complete the
fields for a
default expense
account
(VOMCUP,
VOOBAP,
VOAIDP). The
model journal
entry overrides
the default
expense account.

A-84 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Supplier Master - Batch Table (F0401Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Currency Code VOCRRP Alpha 3 This field is
displayed only if
multicurrency is
activated.
A code that
represents the
currency to be
used when a
voucher is
entered for this
supplier. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in the
Currency Codes
table (F0013).
If you leave this
field blank, the
system uses the
currency
associated with
the company
entered on the
voucher.
Tax Rate Area VOTXA3 Alpha 10 A code that
identifies the
taxing authority
to use on
vouchers for this
supplier. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in the
Tax Areas table
(F4008).
Tax Explanation VOEXR2 Alpha 2 A code that
Code identifies the
type of tax to
apply to
vouchers for this
supplier. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in
UDC table 00/EX
(Tax Explanation
Codes).

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-85


Mapping Fields in the Supplier Master - Batch Table (F0401Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Hold Payment VOHDPY Alpha 1 A code that
Code specifies whether
you can enter
vouchers and
payments for this
supplier. Values
are:
1 or Y: Hold
payment of
outstanding
vouchers and
prevent entry of
new vouchers.
2: Hold payment
of outstanding
vouchers but
allow entry of
new vouchers.
N: Allow entry of
vouchers and
payments.
If you leave this
field blank, the
system uses N.
Tax Rate Area - VOTXA2 Alpha 10 A value that
Withholding identifies the
taxing authority
to use for
withholding tax
for a supplier.
The value in this
field is written to
the Supplier
Master table
(F0401).
This field is not
displayed in the
Accounts
Payable system.
Tax Explanation VOEXR3 Alpha 2 A value
Code - representing the
Withholding type of
withholding tax
to be used for a
supplier. Any
value that you
enter in this field
is written to the
F0401 table.
This field is not
displayed in the
Accounts
Payable system.

A-86 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Supplier Master - Batch Table (F0401Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Tax Authority VOTAWH Number 8 A number that
specifies the tax
authority to
whom
withholding
taxes must be
paid for the
supplier. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in the
F0101 table.
Withholding VOPCWH Number 5 A number that
Percent specifies the rate
of withholding
tax to be retained
from payment to
a supplier. The
number is
expressed as a
decimal. For
example, 20
percent would be
expressed as.20.
Payment Terms VOTRAP Alpha 3 A code that
specifies the due
date and amount
of discount
available to a
supplier.
The value in this
field is entered
on all vouchers
for this supplier.
The value that
you enter in this
field must exist
in the Payment
Terms table
(F0014).

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-87


Mapping Fields in the Supplier Master - Batch Table (F0401Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Multiple VOSCK Alpha 1 A code that
Payments indicates
whether a
separate check
will be issued for
each pay item on
a voucher. Values
are:
Y: Create a
separate check
for each voucher
pay item.
N: Create one
check for the
voucher,
regardless of the
number of pay
items.
C: Create one
check per
contract and
collate the checks
in contract or job
number order.
If you leave this
field blank, the
system uses a
value of N.
Payment VOPYIN Alpha 1 A code that
Instrument specifies the
format of a
payment to be
made to a
supplier. The
value in this field
must exist in
UDC table 00/PY
(Payment
Instrument).
Approver VOSNTO Number 8 A number that
Number identifies the
person
responsible for
approving
vouchers that are
logged using
Voucher Logging.
The value in this
field must exist
in the F0101
table.

A-88 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Supplier Master - Batch Table (F0401Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Pre-Note Code VOAB1 Alpha 1 A code that
indicates
whether a
supplier is in
setup status for
electronic funds
transfer (EFT)
processing.
Values are:
P: Pre-note
status. The
system writes a
check to the
supplier as well
as makes an
entry to the bank
tape table for
verification. he
system does not
do an electronic
transfer of funds
in this status.
N: The bank has
received and
verified the
supplier's
account
information. The
system will
process future
payments to this
supplier using
EFT.
If the field is
blank, the system
assigns the value
P when it
processes the first
payment.
Float Days for VOFLD Number 3 A number that
Payments indicates the
number of days
to be added to
the payment date
for payments.
This number
updates the
Cleared/Value
Date (RMVLDT)
in the Accounts
Payable
Matching
Document Detail
table (F0414)
when automatic
payments are
run.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-89


Mapping Fields in the Supplier Master - Batch Table (F0401Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Amount VOAYPD Number 15 A value
Vouchered YTD indicating the
number of
accounts payable
vouchers written
during the
current year.
Some databases
accept a decimal
identifier while
others do not.
If you use
multicurrency,
the amount
should be in the
currency you
entered in the
VOCRCA field.
Run the Update
YTD Voucher
Amount program
(R04820A) to
update this field.
Amount VOAPPD Number 15 A value
Vouchered PYE indicating the
amount of
vouchers entered
in the prior year.
The system
updates this
value when you
run the Update
YTD Voucher
Amount
program.
Carrier Number VOCARS Number 8 A value that
represents the
address book
number of the
carrier specified
by the customer
or your
organization. Use
this field for
route and special
handling
requirements.
The value in this
field must exist
in the F0101
table.

A.3.3 Optional Fields Used by the Procurement System


This table lists fields in the F0401Z1 table that are optional and are used by the
Procurement system. You can use these fields to provide additional information about
a transaction.

A-90 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Supplier Master - Batch Table (F0401Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Price Pick List VOPLST Alpha 1 A code that
(Y,N,2) indicates
whether net price
information
appears on the
purchase order.
Values are:
Y: Print net
prices.
N: Do not print
prices.
2: Print base price
adjustments and
net prices.
Amount - Open VOAPRC Number 15 A number that
Order indicates the total
amount of open
orders for a
supplier. The
system adjusts
the list price in
the Item Location
File (F41021) by
the discount
tables or any
override price.
Minimum Order VOMINO Number 15 A number that
Value indicates the
lowest amount
that can be
entered for an
order. If the
amount of the
order is less than
the amount in
this field, the
system issues an
error.
Maximum Order VOMAXO Number 15 A number that
Value indicates the
highest amount
that can be
entered for an
order. If the
amount of the
order is greater
than the amount
in this field, the
system issues an
error.
Related Address VOAN8R Number 8 This field is not
Number used in the
Procurement
system and does
not appear on
any form.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-91


Mapping Fields in the Supplier Master - Batch Table (F0401Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Billing Address VOBADT Number 8 This field is not
Type used in the
Procurement
system and does
not appear on
any form.
Customer Price VOCPGP Number 8 This field is not
Group used in the
Procurement
system and does
not appear on
any form.
Order Template VOORTP Alpha 8 A code that
indicates a list of
items that you
frequently order.
The value that
you enter in this
field must exist
in UDC table
40/OT (Order
Templates).
Print Message VOINMG Alpha 10 A code that
indicates a
message that
prints on the
purchase order.
The value that
you enter in this
field must exist
in UDC table
40/PM (Print
Message).
Hold Orders VOHOLD Alpha 2 A code that
Code indicates the
reason an order is
on hold. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in
UDC table
42/HC (Hold
Codes).
Route Code VOROUT Alpha 3 This field is not
used in the
Procurement
system and does
not appear on
any form.
Stop Code VOSTOP Alpha 3 This field is not
used in the
Procurement
system and does
not appear on
any form.

A-92 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Supplier Master - Batch Table (F0401Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Zone Number VOZON Alpha 3 This field is not
used in the
Procurement
system and does
not appear on
any form.
Carrier Number VOCARS Number 8 A value that
represents the
address book
number of the
carrier specified
by the customer
or your
organization. Use
this field for
route and special
handling
requirements.
The value in this
field must exist
in the F0101
table.
Delivery VODEL1 Alpha 30 An informational
Instructions Line field to enter
1 delivery
instructions.
Delivery VODEL2 Alpha 30 An informational
Instructions Line field to enter
2 delivery
instructions.
Transit Days VOLTDT Number 5 This field is not
used in the
Procurement
system and does
not appear on
any form.
Freight Handling VOFRTH Alpha 5 A code that
Code indicates either
the method to
use when
delivering
shipments to a
supplier or who
has responsibility
for freight
charges. The
value you enter
in this field must
exist in UDC
table 42/FR
(Freight
Handling Code).
Purchase Order VOINVC Number 2 A number
Copies specifying the
number of
purchase orders
to print for this
supplier.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-93


Mapping Fields in the Supplier Master - Batch Table (F0401Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Unit of Measure - VOWUMD Alpha 2 A code that
Weight Display specifies the unit
of measure to
display for the
weight of an
order. The value
you enter in this
field must exist
in UDC table
00/UM (Unit of
Measure). If you
leave this field
blank, the system
updates it with
the value entered
in the Inventory
Constants table
(F41001).
Unit of Measure - VOVUMD Alpha 2 A code that
Volume Display identifies the unit
of measure to
display for the
volume of an
order. The value
you enter in this
field must exist
in UDC table
00/UM (Unit of
Measure). If you
leave this field
blank, the system
updates it with
the value entered
in the F41001
table.
Landed Cost VOPRP5 Alpha 3 A code that
Rule indicates
purchasing costs
that exceed the
price of an item,
for example,
broker fees and
commissions.
Landed cost rules
are set up in the
Landed Cost
Revisions
program
(P41291). The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in
UDC table 41/P5
(Landed Cost
Rule).

A-94 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Supplier Master - Batch Table (F0401Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Batch Processing VOEDPM Alpha 1 A code that
Mode indicates
whether the
supplier is
excluded from
batch processing
or whether the
supplier is in a
test or
production
mode. Values are:
I: Inhibited. The
supplier is not
available for
batch processing
T: Test mode.
Only reports are
produced when
the record is
processed.
P: Production
mode. Reports
and orders are
produced when
the record is
processed.
Supplier Type VOEDCI Alpha 1 A code that
Identifier specifies the type
of number to be
sent to an EDI
transaction, for
example, a
DUNS or
telephone
number. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in
UDC table 40/CI
(Customer Type
Identifier).
Item Type VOEDII Alpha 1 A code that
Identifier specifies the type
of item number
to be sent in an
EDI transaction,
for example, UPC
code or supplier
part number. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in
UDC table 40/II
(Item Type
Identifier).

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-95


Mapping Fields in the Supplier Master - Batch Table (F0401Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Quantity VOEDQD Number 1 A number that
Decimals specifies the
number of
positions to the
right of the
decimal point to
use for all
quantity fields in
an EDI
transaction for
this supplier.
Amount VOEDAD Number 1 A number that
Decimals specifies the
number of
positions to the
right of the
decimal point to
use for all
amount fields in
an EDI
transaction for
this supplier.
Delivery Note VOEDF1 Alpha 1 This field is not
used in the
Procurement
system and does
not appear on
any form.
Item Restrictions VOEDF2 Alpha 2 A code that
indicates
whether
restrictions are
placed on
ordering items
from this
supplier. Values
are:
Blank: No
restrictions.
I: An item can be
purchased only if
it is on the Item
Restrictions form.
E: An item
cannot be
purchased if it is
on the Item
Restrictions form.
Supplier/ Parent VOVI01 Alpha 1 A code that
Rebate Level indicates the
organizational
level that the
rebate system is
based upon. The
value in this field
must exist in
UDC table 43/RL
(Rebate Level).

A-96 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Supplier Master - Batch Table (F0401Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Supplier Rebate VOVI02 Alpha 1 A code that
Code indicates
whether rebates
are active for this
supplier. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in
UDC table
43/RA (Supplier
Rebate Code).
Special VOVI03 Alpha 1 Reserved for
Instruction 3 future use.
Special VOVI04 Alpha 1 Reserved for
Instruction 4 future use.
Special VOVI05 Alpha 1 Reserved for
Instruction 5 future use.
Minimum Check VOMNSC Alpha 1 This field is not
Amount Code used in the
Procurement
system and does
not appear on
any form.
Address Type VOATO Alpha 1 This field is not
Code 5 used in the
Procurement
system and does
not appear on
any form.
Revenue Netted VORVNT Alpha 1 This field is not
(Y/N) used in the
Procurement
system and does
not appear on
any form.
Price and VOASN Alpha 8 This field is not
Adjustment used in the
Schedule Procurement
system and does
not appear on
any form.
Send Method VOCRMD Alpha 1 This field is not
used in the
Procurement
system and does
not appear on
any form.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-97


Mapping Fields in the Supplier Master - Batch Table (F0401Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Evaluated VOAVCH Alpha 1 A code that
Receipt indicates
Settlement whether you and
the supplier have
an agreement
that you submit a
voucher based on
what is received.
The supplier
does not send an
invoice and you
can bypass the
Payment with
Voucher Match
program. The
system uses the
Evaluated
Receipt
Settlement
program
(R43800) instead.
Values are:
N: Not eligible
for evaluated
receipt settlement
processing.
Y: Eligible for
evaluated receipt
settlement
processing.
T: Eligible for
evaluated receipt
settlement
processing but a
tolerance error
occurred during
the receipt
process.
R: Eligible for
evaluated receipt
settlement
processing but
the receipt is
currently in the
receipt routing
process.
V: The receipt
transaction has
been vouchered
using the
evaluated receipt
settlement
process.

A.3.4 Ignored Fields


This table lists fields in the F0401Z1 table that are ignored. Leave these fields blank.
The system does not use the values in these fields.

A-98 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Supplier Master - Batch Table (F0401Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length


Transaction VOTORG Alpha 10
Originator
User ID VOUSER Alpha 10
Program ID VOPID Alpha 10
Work Station ID VOJOBN Alpha 10
Date Updated VOUPMJ Date 6
Time Last Updated VOUPMT Number 6
Time of Day VOTDAY Date 6
EDI - Document Type VOEDCT Alpha 2
EDI Translation VOEDFT Alpha 10
Format
EDI - Transmission VOEDDT Date 6
Date

A.3.5 User-Reserved Fields


This table lists fields in the F0401Z1 table that are reserved for users.

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Amount - VOABAM Number 15 A user-defined
Address Book number that
represents an
amount. Use a
format that your
database accepts.
Amount - VOABA1 Number 15 A user-defined
Address Book number that
represents an
amount. Use a
format that your
database accepts.
User Reserved VOURCD Alpha 3 A user-defined
Code code that
represents any
alphanumeric
value up to three
characters.
User Reserved VOURDT Date 6 A user-defined
Date value that
represents a date.
Use a format that
your database
accepts.
See the data item
for VOEBDT for
more
information.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-99


Mapping Fields in the Batch Who's Who Information Table (F0111Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


User Reserved VOURAT Number 15 A user-defined
Amount value that
represents an
amount. Use a
format that your
database accepts.
User Reserved VOURAB Number 8 A user-defined
Number number up to
eight digits.
User Reserved VOURRF Alpha 15 A user-defined
Reference alphanumeric
value up to 15
characters.

A.4 Mapping Fields in the Batch Who's Who Information Table (F0111Z1)
This section contains a list of the fields in the F0111Z1 table. Some of the fields are
required to run the Who's Who Information Batch Upload program (R011110Z), while
others are not. Not all fields are displayed on address book forms or used by the
Address Book system.

A.4.1 Required Fields


The table lists fields in the F0111Z1 that are required. For some fields, blank is a valid
value.

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


EDI - User ID CBEDUS Alpha 10 A number that
identifies the
user. Enter the
User ID of the
person running
the process or the
person who is to
receive workflow
messages. This
field, in
conjunction with
the CBEDTN and
CBEDBT fields,
uniquely
identifies a
specific
transaction.

A-100 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Batch Who's Who Information Table (F0111Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


EDI - Batch CBEDBT Alpha 15 A number that
Number identifies a
particular batch
of data. This
field, in
conjunction with
the CBEDTN and
CBEDUS fields,
uniquely
identifies a
transaction
within a specific
batch.
This field also
serves as a level
break and assigns
a new batch
number each
time that the
value changes.
You must assign
a unique batch
number for each
new transaction
being processed
to correspond
and maintain
integrity with the
EDI-Batch
Number field in
F01151Z1
(EBEDBT),
F01161Z1
(LBEDBT), or
F01112Z1
(PBEDBT).
EDI - Transaction CBEDTN Alpha 22 A number that
Number identifies each
transaction. A
new transaction
number indicates
a different
address book
record. You
cannot have
more than one
transaction with
the same number
in a batch.
Typically, this
field contains the
document
number of the
source system so
that the sender
can readily
identify the
transaction.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-101


Mapping Fields in the Batch Who's Who Information Table (F0111Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


EDI - Line CBEDLN Number 7 A number used
Number to uniquely
identify a record.
Each transaction
can have
multiple,
consecutive line
numbers.
EDI - CBEDSP Alpha 1 A value that
Successfully indicates
Processed whether a
transaction
successfully
processed. Leave
this field blank.
The value N
indicates that the
transaction was
not processed or
was processed in
error.
The system
changes the
value to Y after
the transaction is
successfully
processed.

A-102 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Batch Who's Who Information Table (F0111Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Transaction CBTNAC Alpha 2 A value that
Action indicates the
transaction to be
performed. The
value A indicates
a new
transaction. The
value C indicates
a change to an
existing
document. The
value D indicates
a deletion for an
existing record.
You must process
changes and
deletions after
you process
additions.
For outbound
processing, the
system updates
the value in this
field with either
after image (UA)
or before image
(UB). The system
uses UB only if
the processing
option in the
Address Book
MBF (P0100041)
is activated.
For outbound
processing, you
can also enter A
for additions and
D for deletions.
Alpha Name CBALPH Alpha 40 A name typically
entered in the
format of last
name, first name
to optimize
search
capabilities. The
Word Search
program
(P01BDWRD)
uses this field.
Address Number CBAN8 Number 8 A value that
uniquely
identifies a
customer.
The value in this
field must exist
in the Address
Book Master
table (F0101) or
the record will
not process.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-103


Mapping Fields in the Batch Who's Who Information Table (F0111Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Who's Who Line CBIDLN Number 5 A value that
connects a who's
who entry to an
address book
number.
Mailing Name CBMLNM Alpha 40 An alphanumeric
value
representing the
name of the
company or the
person to whom
correspondence
is sent.

A.4.2 Optional Fields


This table lists fields in the F0111Z1 table that are optional. You can use these fields to
provide additional information about a transaction.

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Type - CBTYTN Alpha 8 A value that
Transaction identifies the
type of
transaction. If
you leave this
field blank, the
system uses the
value in the
transaction type
processing option
of the Who's
Who MBF
(P0100087), if set
up.
This field is
required if you
use outbound
processing.
Direction CBDRIN Alpha 1 A value that
Indicator specifies whether
the transaction is
inbound or
outbound. Leave
this field blank if
the transaction is
inbound. Enter 2
if the transaction
is outbound.
EDI - Detail Lines CBEDDL Number 5 The number of
Processed detail lines
included in a
specific
transaction. This
field is
informational
only.

A-104 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Batch Who's Who Information Table (F0111Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Trading Partner CBPNID Alpha 15 A value used in
ID an Electronic
Data Interchange
(EDI) transaction
to identify who is
trading
documents with
you.
Display Sequence CBDSS5 Number 5 A code that
specifies the
order in which a
group of records
displays. You can
specify a display
sequence for each
of your contact
entries.
Contact Title CBATTL Alpha 40 A code that
indicates the
professional title
for a contact.
Remark CBREM1 Alpha 40 An informational
field that you can
use for a remark,
description, or
name. The
system does not
display this field
on any forms in
the Address Book
system.
Salutation Name CBSLNM Alpha 40 An informational
code that
represents a title
of courtesy used
before a
surname. It is
used as a
greeting word in
correspondence.
Secondary Alpha CBALP1 Alpha 30 An alternate
Name name field to
accommodate
double-byte
coding.
Given Name CBGNNM Alpha 25 The first name of
a person. This
field is
informational.
Middle Name CBMDNM Alpha 25 The middle name
of a person. This
field is
informational.
Surname CBSRNM Alpha 25 The surname of a
person. This field
is informational
only.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-105


Mapping Fields in the Batch Who's Who Information Table (F0111Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Type Code CBTYC Alpha 1 A user-defined
code that
identifies the
function of a
contact (who's
who) entry.
Examples of type
codes are:
A: Attention
name
B: Billing
C: Contact
E: Emergency
contact
O: Other
T: 1099 legal
name
The value that
you enter in this
field must exist
in UDC table
01/WO (Type
Code).
Nickname CBNICK Alpha 40 An informational
field to use for
the nickname for
a person. The
nickname is
connected to a
who's who line of
an address book
number.
Gender CBGEND Alpha 1 A code that
indicates the
gender of a
person. Values
are:
M: Male
F: Female
Effective Date for CBEFTW Date 8 The date the
Address address that is
identified in the
Alternate
Address table
(F01161) becomes
active.
You must select
the Address by
Effective Date
option in the
Address Book
constants if you
want to enter
effective dates.

A-106 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Batch Who's Who Information Table (F0111Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Date of Birth CBDDATE Number 2 A number that
indicates the day
portion for a
person's date of
birth.
Month of Birth CBDMON Number 2 A number that
indicates the
month portion
for a person's
date of birth.
Year of Birth CBDYR Number 4 A number that
indicates the year
portion for a
person's date of
birth.
Who's Who CBW001 through Alpha 3 A category code.
Category Codes CBW010 The values that
01 through 10 you enter in the
category code
fields must exist
in the
corresponding
UDC tables
01/W0-01/WT.
Who's Who CBWN001 Alpha 3 A category code.
Information through The values that
Category Codes CBWN010 you enter in the
01 through 10 category code
fields must exist
in the
corresponding
UDC tables
01/N1-01/NA.
Preferred Contact CBPCM Alpha 10 A user-defined
Method code (01/CQ)
that defines the
desired contact
method for the
contact.
Primary Contact CBPCF Alpha 1 A code used to
designate
primary contacts
for an address
book entity. You
can have only
one primary
contact per
contact type.
Enter 1 to
designate a
record as a
primary contact.
Indicator Flag CBACTIN Character 1 This field is
reserved for
future use.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-107


Mapping Fields in the Batch Who's Who Information Table (F0111Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Unique Identifier CBCFRGUID Alpha 36 This field is used
for
synchronization
with Domino or
Exchange to
uniquely identify
a who's who
record.
Function Code CBFUCO Alpha 10 A user-defined
code that
indicates the
function the
contact plays in
the company.
Enter a value
from UDC
01/FC.
Reference Name CBREFNAME Alpha 40 This field is used
for
synchronization
with Domino and
Exchange. Enter
the company
name from
Domino or
Exchange. The
system uses this
value to search
for a duplicate
entry.
Child CBCHPROC Character 1 A code used to
Successfully designate
Processed whether child
records for the
F0111Z1 record
have processed
successfully.
Child records
include records
from these tables:
F01161Z1
F0115Z1
F01151Z1
F01112Z1
Child records are
associated with
the parent
F0111Z1 field
using EDI-User,
EDI-Batch
Number, and
EDI-Transaction
number.

A.4.3 Ignored Fields


This table lists fields in the F0111Z1 table that are ignored. The system does not use the
values in these fields.

A-108 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Batch Who's Who Information Table (F0111Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length


EDI - Document Type CBEDCT Alpha 2
EDI - Translation CBEDFT Alpha 10
Format
EDI - Transmission CBEDDT Date 6
Date
Description - CBDC Alpha 40
Compressed
Transaction CBTORG Alpha 10
Originator
User ID CBUSER Alpha 10
Program ID CBPID Alpha 10
Work Station ID CBJOBN Alpha 10
Date Updated CBUPMJ Date 6
Time of Day CBTDAY Date 6
Time Last Updated CBUPMT Number 6

A.4.4 User-Reserved Fields


This table lists fields in the F0111Z1 table that are reserved for users. The system does
not use the values in these fields.

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Secondary CBMLN1 Alpha 1 An alternate
Mailing Name mailing name
field to
accommodate
double-byte
coding.
Search Type CBAT1 Alpha 3 A value that
identifies a
record as part of
a specific group,
such as suppliers,
customers,
employees, and
companies. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in
UDC table 01/ST
(Search Type).
Active/ Inactive CBCCAI Alpha 1 An indicator that
Flag specifies a
currency relation
as active or
inactive.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-109


Mapping Fields in the Batch - Related Person Table (F01112Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Contact Type CBNTYP Alpha 3 A user-defined
value that
indicates the role
of the contact,
such as an
influencer, a
competitor, and
so on. The value
that you enter in
this field must
exist in UDC
table 01/CT
(Contact Type).

A.5 Mapping Fields in the Batch - Related Person Table (F01112Z1)


This section contains a list of the fields in the F01112Z1 table. Some of the fields are
required to run the Contact Information Batch Upload program (R011110Z), while
others are not. Not all fields are displayed on address book forms or used by the
Address Book system.

A.5.1 Required Fields


This table lists fields in the F01112Z1 table that are required. For some fields, blank is a
valid value.

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


EDI - User ID PBEDUS Alpha 10 A number that
identifies a
particular user
who is running
the process or
who is to receive
workflow
messages. This
field, used in
conjunction with
the PBEDTN and
PBEDBT fields,
uniquely
identifies a
transaction
within a specific
batch.

A-110 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Batch - Related Person Table (F01112Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


EDI - Batch PBEDBT Alpha 15 A value that
Number identifies a batch.
This field, used
in conjunction
with the PBEDUS
and PBEDTN
fields, uniquely
identifies a
transaction
within that batch.
Each time the
value changes,
the system
assigns a new
batch number.
You can
significantly
improve
performance by
assigning one
batch number for
each group of
records.
EDI - Transaction PBEDTN Alpha 22 A value that
Number identifies each
transaction. Each
new transaction
number indicates
a new related
person record. A
batch cannot
contain more
than one
transaction with
the same number.
Typically, this
field typically
contains the
document
number of the
source system so
that a record can
be readily
identified.
EDI - Line PBEDLN Number 7 A number used
Number to uniquely
identify a record.
Each transaction
can have
multiple,
consecutive line
numbers.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-111


Mapping Fields in the Batch - Related Person Table (F01112Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


EDI - PBEDSP Alpha 1 A
Successfully system-provided
Processed value that
indicates
whether the
transaction
processed
successfully.
Values are:
N: The
transaction did
not process or
processed in
error.
Y: The
transaction
processed
successfully.
For outbound
processing,
system updates
the value to N.

A-112 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Batch - Related Person Table (F01112Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Transaction PBTNAC Alpha 2 For inbound
Action processing, a
value that
specifies the type
of transaction.
Values are:
A: The record is
new.
C: The record is a
change for an
existing
document.
Process changes
after additions.
D: The record is a
deletion for an
existing
document.
Process deletions
after additions.
For outbound
processing,
values are:
UA: After image
UB: Before image
The system
updates the table
with UB only if
the processing
option in the
Who's Who MBF
(P0100087) is
activated.
For outbound
processing, you
can also enter A
for additions and
D for deletions.
Address Number PBAN8 Number 8 A value that
connects the
related person to
a unique address
book record. The
value in this field
must exist in the
Address Book
Master table
(F0101) or the
record will not
process.
Who's Who Line PBIDLN Number 5 A value that
connects a who's
who entry to an
address book
record.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-113


Mapping Fields in the Batch - Related Person Table (F01112Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Related Person PBRALP Alpha 40 A value that
connects a
related person
entry to address
book record.

A.5.2 Optional Fields


This table lists fields in the F01112Z1 table that are optional. You can use these fields to
provide additional information about a transaction.

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Type - PBTYTN Alpha 8 A value that
Transaction identifies the
type of
transaction being
processed.
If you leave this
field blank, the
system uses the
value in the
transaction type
processing option
of the Who's
Who MBF
(P0100087), if set
up.
You must
complete this
field if you are
using outbound
processing.
Direction PBDRIN Alpha 1 A value that
Indicator indicates
whether a
transaction is
inbound or
outbound. Values
are:
Blank: Inbound
2: Outbound
EDI - Detail Lines PBEDDL Number 5 A value used in
Processed an Electronic
Data Interchange
(EDI) transaction
to specify the
number of detail
lines included in
a specific
transaction. This
field is
informational
only.

A-114 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Batch - Related Person Table (F01112Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Trading Partner PBPNID Alpha 15 A value used in
ID an EDI
transaction to
identify who is
trading
documents with
you.
Related Person PBCNLN Number 5 A value used to
ID connect a who's
who or contact
record with a
related person.
Each related
person record
must have a
unique value in
this field.
If you are
changing or
deleting records,
this field is
required.
Relation Type PBRELY Alpha 5 A value that
identifies the
relationship
between the
contact the
related person.
The value that
you enter in this
field must exist
in UDC table
01/RT.
Day of Birth PBDDATE Number 2 A numeric value
that specifies the
day portion of
the date of birth
of a related
person.
Month of Birth PBDMON Number 2 A number that
specifies the
month portion of
the date of birth
of a related
person.
Year of Birth PBDYR Number 4 A number that
specifies the year
portion of an
individual's date
of birth.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-115


Mapping Fields in the Phones - Interoperability Table (F0115Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Related Person PBCP001 through Alpha 3 Category codes
Category Codes PBCP005 that are defined
01 through 10 in the Address
Book system and
are used for
reporting about
related persons.
The values that
you enter in
these fields must
exist in the
corresponding
UDC tables
01/CP001-01/CP
005.

A.5.3 Ignored Fields


This table lists fields in the F01112Z1 table that are ignored. The system does not use
the values you enter in these fields.

Field Name Alias Type Length


EDI - Document Type PBEDCT Alpha 2
EDI - Translation PBEDFT Alpha 10
Format
EDI - Transmission PBEDDT Date 6
Date
Transaction PBTORG Alpha 10
Originator
User ID PBUSER Alpha 10
Program ID PBPID Alpha 10
Work Station ID PBJOBN Alpha 10
Date Updated PBUPMJ Date 6
Time of Day PBTDAY Date 6
Time Last Updated PBUPMT Number 6

A.6 Mapping Fields in the Phones - Interoperability Table (F0115Z1)


This section contains a list of the fields in the F0115Z1. Some of the fields are required
to run the Batch Who's Who Information program (R011110Z), while others are not

A.6.1 Required Fields


This table lists the fields in the F01151Z1 table that are required.

A-116 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Phones - Interoperability Table (F0115Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


EDI-User ID PIEDUS Alpha 10 A user-defined
identification
number. Enter
the user ID of the
person running
the process or the
person who is to
receive workflow
messages. This
field, in
conjunction with
the PIEDTN and
PIEDBT fields,
uniquely
identifies a
specific
transaction.
If you are
uploading phone
numbers for a
who's who
record, enter the
value used to
upload the who's
who record.
EDI-Batch PIEDBT Alpha 15 A code that, in
Number conjunction with
the PIEDTN and
PIEDUS fields,
uniquely
identifies a
transaction
within a specific
batch.
This field also
serves as a level
break and causes
the system to
assign a new
batch number
each time that the
value changes.
You can
significantly
increase
performance by
assigning one
batch number for
each group of
transactions.
If you are
uploading phone
numbers for a
who's who
record, enter the
value used to
upload the who's
who record.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-117


Mapping Fields in the Phones - Interoperability Table (F0115Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


EDI-Transaction PIEDTN Alpha 22 A code that
Number identifies each
transaction. Each
new transaction
number indicates
a different who's
who record. You
cannot have
more than one
transaction with
the same number
in a batch.
Typically, this
field contains the
document
number of the
source system so
that a transaction
can be readily
identified.
If you are
uploading phone
numbers for a
who's who
record, enter the
value used for
the who's who
record.
EDI-Line PIEDLN Number 7 A number used
Number to uniquely
identify a record.
Each transaction
can have
multiple,
consecutive line
numbers.
If you are
uploading a
phone number
for a who's who
record, enter 0. If
you are
uploading a
phone number
for a related
person record,
enter the value in
the EDLN
number field that
was used to
upload the
related person
record.
EDI -Transaction PIEDTL String 20 A number used
Line to identify phone
number records.
Enter a unique
number for each
phone number
record.

A-118 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Phones - Interoperability Table (F0115Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Transaction PITNAC Alpha 1 A value that
Action indicates the
transaction to be
performed. The
value A indicates
a new
transaction. The
value C indicates
a change to an
existing
document. The
value D indicates
a deletion for an
existing record.
You must process
changes and
deletions after
you process
additions.
Successfully PIEDSP Alpha 1 A value that
Processed indicates
whether a
transaction was
successfully
processed. Leave
this field blank.
The value N
indicates that the
transaction was
not processed or
was processed in
error.
The system
changes the
value to Y when
the transaction is
successfully
processed
Address Number PIAN8 Number 8 A value that
uniquely
identifies a
supplier,
customer,
employee, and so
on.
Enter the
Address Book
number of the
customer or
supplier for
which you are
uploading phone
information.
Phone Number PIPH1 Number 20 A number that
indicates the
phone number
for the contact
person for which
you are
uploading phone
information.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-119


Mapping Fields in the Phones - Interoperability Table (F0115Z1)

A.6.2 Optional Fields


This table lists the fields in the F0115Z1 table that are optional.

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Type Transaction PITYTN Alpha 8 A value that
identifies the
type of
transaction.
Direction PIDRIN Alpha 1 A value that
Indicator specifies whether
the transaction is
inbound or
outbound. Values
are:
Blank: Inbound
1: Outbound
Outbound
processing for
phones is not
supported.
Detail Lines PIEDDL Number 5 The number of
Processed detail lines
included in a
specific
transaction. This
field is
informational
only.
Trading Partner PIPNID Alpha 15 A value used in
ID an Electronic
Data Interchange
(EDI) transaction
to identify who is
trading
documents with
you.
Who's Who Line PIIDLN Number 5 A code used to
Number-ID identify the line
ID number for a
Who's Who
record.
Line Number PIRCK7 Number 5 A number used
ID5.0 to create a unique
key within a file.
If you are using a
program which
will allow you to
resequence the
records, we
recommend you
use one of these
data dictionary
items: DSS5,
DSS7, DSS9.

A-120 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Phones - Interoperability Table (F0115Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Related PICNLN Number 5 A number that is
Person-ID used to identify
related person
records. This
field is used
when you change
or delete related
person records.
Enter the line
number of the
related person
that you want to
change or delete.
Phone Number PIPHTP Alpha 4 A code that
Type indicates either
the location or
use of a
telephone
number. Enter a
valid code from
UDC 01/PH.
Phone Prefix PIAR1 Alpha 6 A number that
designates the
first segment of a
telephone
number. In the
United States, the
prefix is the
three-digit area
code.
Generic Number PICFN01 Number 8 This field is
1 reserved for
future use.
General PIGEN1 Alpha 10 This field is
Information1 reserved for
future use.
Future Flag Use PIFALGE Character 1 This field is
reserved for
future use.

A.6.3 Ignored Fields


This table lists the fields in the F0115Z1 that are ignored by the system. The system
does not use the values in these fields.

Field Name Alias Type Length


EDI-Translation PIEDFT Alpha 10
Format
EDI-Transmission PIEDDT Date 6
Date
EDI-Document Type PIEDCT Alpha 2
User ID PIUSER Alpha 10
Program ID PIPID Alpha 10
Work Station ID PIJOBN Alpha 10

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-121


Mapping Fields in the Batch - Electronic Address Table (F01151Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length


Date Updated PIUPMJ Date 6
Time Last Updated PIUPMT Number 6

A.7 Mapping Fields in the Batch - Electronic Address Table (F01151Z1)


This section contains a list of the fields in the F01151Z1 table. Some of the fields are
required to run the Batch Who's Who Information program (R011110Z), while others
are not. Not all fields are displayed on address book forms or used by the Address
Book system.

A.7.1 Required Fields


This table lists fields in the F01151Z1 table that are required. For some fields, blank is a
valid value.

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


EDI - User ID EBEDUS Alpha 10 A user-defined
identification
number. Enter
the user ID of the
person running
the process or the
person who is to
receive workflow
messages. This
field, in
conjunction with
the EBEDTN and
EBEDBT fields,
uniquely
identifies a
specific
transaction.
EDI - Batch EBEDBT Alpha 15 A code that, in
Number conjunction with
the EBEDTN and
EBEDUS fields,
uniquely
identifies a
transaction
within a specific
batch.
This field also
serves as a level
break and causes
the system to
assign a new
batch number
each time that the
value changes.
You can
significantly
increase
performance by
assigning one
batch number for
each group of
transactions.

A-122 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Batch - Electronic Address Table (F01151Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


EDI - Transaction EBEDTN Alpha 22 A code that
Number identifies each
transaction. Each
new transaction
number indicates
a different
address book
record. You
cannot have
more than one
transaction with
the same number
in a batch.
Typically, this
field contains the
document
number of the
source system so
that a transaction
can be readily
identified.
EDI - Line EBEDLN Number 7 A number used
Number to uniquely
identify a record.
Each transaction
can have
multiple,
consecutive line
numbers.
EDI - EBEDSP Alpha 1 A value that
Successfully indicates
Processed whether the
transaction has
successfully
processed. The
value N indicates
that the
transaction was
not processed or
was processed in
error. After the
transaction is
successfully
processed, the
system changes
the value to Y.
For outbound
processing, the
value is updated
to N.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-123


Mapping Fields in the Batch - Electronic Address Table (F01151Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Transaction EBTNAC Alpha 2 A value that
Action indicates the type
of transaction.
For a new entry,
enter A in this
field. If you are
processing a
change for an
existing
document, enter
C. All changes
must be
processed after
additions.
For outbound
processing, the
system updates
this field with
either UA (after
image) or UB
(before image).
The system
updates the table
with UB only if
the processing
option in the
Who's Who MBF
(P0100087) is
activated.
For outbound
processing, you
can also enter D
for deletion and
A for additions.
Address Number EBAN8 Number 8 A value that
uniquely
identifies the
company,
customer,
supplier, and so
on to which the
contact (who's
who) for the
related person is
linked. The value
in this field must
exist in the
Address Book
Master table
(F0101) or the
record does not
process.
Who's Who Line EBIDLN Number 5 A value that
connects the
electronic
address to a
particular who's
who entry for the
address number
entered in the
EBAN8 field.

A-124 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Batch - Electronic Address Table (F01151Z1)

A.7.2 Optional Fields


This table lists fields in the F01151Z1 table that are optional. You can use these fields to
provide additional information about a transaction.

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Type - EBTYTN Alpha 8 A value that
Transaction identifies
whether the
transaction is for
the after image
only, or the
before and after
image. If you
leave this field
blank and the
transaction type
processing option
of the Who's
Who MBF
(P0100087) is set
up, the system
updates this field
with the value in
the processing
option.
You must
complete this
field if you are
using outbound
processing.
Direction EBDRIN Alpha 1 A value that
Indicator specifies whether
a transaction is
inbound or
outbound. Values
are:
Blank: Inbound
2: Outbound
EDI - Detail Lines EBEDDL Number 5 A value
Processed indicating the
number of detail
lines included in
a specific
transaction. This
field is for user
verification only.
Trading Partner EBPNID Alpha 15 A value used in
ID an EDI
transaction that
identifies the
party trading
documents with
you.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-125


Mapping Fields in the Batch - Electronic Address Table (F01151Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Line Number EBRCK7 Number 5 A value that
ID-5.0 indicates a
unique key field.
If you have more
than one
electronic mail
address for a
contact or who's
who entry, you
can use this field
to order the
entries.
Electronic EBETP Alpha 4 A value that
Address Type indicates
whether an
address is an
E-mail address or
an internet
address.
Electronic EBEMAL Alpha 256 A value that
Address identifies the
E-mail or internet
address for the
contact or who's
who individual.
Messaging EBEHIER Number 2 The messaging
Indicator indicator used by
workflow to
determine how
E-mail addresses
will be
processed. Enter
00 if E-mail will
not be sent to the
specified
address. Enter 01
if E-mail will be
sent to the
specified
address.
E-mail Format EBEFOR Alpha 15 Enter the format
of the E-mail
address, for
example:
HTML
Text
RTF
Generic Number EBCFN01 Number 8 This field is
1 reserved for
future use.
General EBGEN1 Alpha 10 This field is
Information 1 reserved for
future use.
Future Flag Use EBFALGE Alpha 1 This field is
reserved for
future use.

A-126 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Batch - Alternative Address Table (F01161Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


E-mail EBCLASS Alpha 3 Reserved for
Classification future use.

A.7.3 Ignored Fields


This table lists fields in the F01151Z1 table that are ignored. The system does not use
the values in these fields.

Field Name Alias Type Length


EDI - Document Type EBEDCT Alpha 2
EDI - Translation EBEDFT Alpha 10
Format
EDI - Transmission EBEDDT Date 6
Date
Transaction EBTORG Alpha 10
Originator
User ID EBUSER Alpha 10
Program ID EBPID Alpha 10
Work Station ID EBJOBN Alpha 10
Date Updated EBUPMJ Date 6
Time of Day EBTDAY Date 6
Time Last Updated EBUPMT Number 6

A.8 Mapping Fields in the Batch - Alternative Address Table (F01161Z1)


This section contains a list of the fields in the F01161Z1 table. Some of the fields are
required to run the Contact Information Batch Upload program (R011110Z), while
others are not. Not all fields are displayed on address book forms or used by the
Address Book system.

A.8.1 Required Fields


This table lists fields in the F01161Z1 table that are required. For some fields, blank is a
valid value. Values entered in these fields are processed into the Alternate Address
table (F01161).

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-127


Mapping Fields in the Batch - Alternative Address Table (F01161Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


EDI - User ID LBEDUS Alpha 10 A user-defined
identification
number. Enter
the user ID of the
person who runs
the Contact
Information
Batch Upload
program or the
person who is to
receive workflow
messages. This
field, in
conjunction with
the LBEDTN and
LBEDBT fields,
uniquely
identifies a
specific
transaction.
EDI - Batch LBEDBT Alpha 15 A number the
Number person who runs
the Contact
Information
Batch Upload
program assigns
to each batch.
The system
assigns a new
batch number
whenever this
field changes.
You can
significantly
increase
performance by
assigning one
batch number for
each group of
transactions you
process.
EDI - Transaction LBEDTN Alpha 22 A number that
Number identifies each
transaction. A
new transaction
number indicates
a different
alternative
address record.
You cannot have
more than one
transaction with
the same number
in a batch.
Typically, this
field contains the
document
number of the
source system so
the sender can
readily identify
the transaction.

A-128 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Batch - Alternative Address Table (F01161Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


EDI - Line LBEDLN Number 7 A number used
Number to uniquely
identify a record.
Each transaction
can have
multiple,
consecutive line
numbers.
EDI - LBEDSP Alpha 1 A value that
Successfully indicates
Processed whether a
transaction
successfully
processed. Leave
this field blank.
The value N
indicates that the
transaction was
not processed or
was processed in
error.
The system
changes the
value to Y after
the transaction is
successfully
processed.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-129


Mapping Fields in the Batch - Alternative Address Table (F01161Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Transaction LBTNAC Alpha 2 A value that
Action indicates the
transaction to be
performed. The
value A indicates
a new
transaction. The
value C indicates
a change to an
existing
document. The
value D indicates
a deletion for an
existing record.
You must process
changes and
deletions after
you process
additions.
For outbound
processing, the
system updates
this field with
either after image
(UA) or before
image (UB). The
system uses UB
only if the
processing option
in the Contact
Information MBF
PO is activated.
For outbound
processing, you
can also enter A
for additions and
D for deletions.

A-130 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Batch - Alternative Address Table (F01161Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Address Number LBAN8 Number 8 A value that
uniquely
identifies a
supplier,
customer,
employee,
company, and so
on.
If you leave this
field blank, the
system assigns a
number based on
the Next
Numbers
Automatic table
(F0002) for the
Address Book
system.
If you enter a
value in this
field, it cannot
exist in the
Address Book
Master table
(F0101) unless
the SZTNAC
field has a value
of C, which
indicates a
change to an
existing record.
Otherwise, the
system considers
the transaction a
duplicate and
will not process
it.
Type - Address LBATYPE Alpha 5 A code that
indicates the type
of address, such
as a home
address or an
office address.
The value you
enter in this field
must exist in
UDC table 01/AT
(Address Type).
Who's Who Line LBIDLN Number 5 A value that
specifies which
who's who entry
is associated with
an alternative
address record.

A.8.2 Optional Fields


This table lists fields in the F01161Z1 that are optional. You can use these fields to
provide additional information about a transaction.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-131


Mapping Fields in the Batch - Alternative Address Table (F01161Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Type - LBTYTN Alpha 8 A value that
Transaction identifies the
type of
transaction. If
you leave this
field blank and
the transaction
type processing
option of the
Who's Who MBF
(P0100087) is set
up, the system
updates this field
with the value in
the processing
option.
This field is
required if you
use outbound
processing.
Direction LBDRIN Alpha 1 A value that
Indicator specifies whether
the transaction is
inbound or
outbound. Values
are:
Blank: Inbound
2: Outbound
EDI - Detail Lines LBEDDL Number 5 The number of
Processed detail lines
included in a
specific
transaction. This
field is
informational
only.
Trading Partner LBPNID Alpha 15 A value used in
ID an Electronic
Data Interchange
(EDI) transaction
to identify who is
trading
documents with
you.

A-132 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Batch - Alternative Address Table (F01161Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


Date - Beginning LBEFTB Date 6 The date the
Effective alternative
address record
first becomes
effective. Use a
format that your
database accepts.
Some databases
allow you to
enter the date in
a Gregorian date
format (mmddyy
or yymmdd),
while other
databases require
a Julian date
format.
The Julian date
format is cyyddd
(where c =
century). Enter 1
for transactions
in the 21st
century. For
example, the date
6/1/2005
corresponds to a
Julian date
105152. For
6/1/04, the
corresponding
Julian date is
104153 (because
the year 2000 has
a leap day,
2/29/00).
Address Line 1, LBADD1 Alpha 40 Alphanumeric
Address Line 2, values that
LBADD2
Address Line 3, identify the
Address Line 4 LBADD3 mailing address
for the
LBADD4
alternative
address record.
Postal Code LBADDZ Alpha 12 A code assigned
by the postal
service of a
country that is
attached to the
address to
facilitate mail
delivery.
City LBCTY1 Alpha 25 The city
associated with
an alternative
address.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-133


Mapping Fields in the Batch - Alternative Address Table (F01161Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length Definition


County LBCOUN Alpha 25 The county,
parish, or other
political district
associated with
an address for
mail delivery or
for tax purposes.
State LBADDS Alpha 3 The state or
province
associated with
an address. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in
UDC table 00/S
(State or
Province).
Country LBCTR Alpha 3 The country
associated with
an address. The
value that you
enter in this field
must exist in
UDC table
00/CN (Country
Codes).
Effective Date LBEFTF Alpha 1 A code that
Existence (I/O) indicates
whether there is
an effective date
for an address.
Main Address LBMAINA Alpha 1 A code that
Flag indicates that the
address is the
primary address.

A.8.3 Ignored Fields


This table lists fields in the F01161Z1 table that are ignored. The system does not use
the values in these fields.

Field Name Alias Type Length


EDI - Document Type LBEDCT Alpha 2
EDI - Translation LBEDFT Alpha 10
Format
EDI - Transmission LBEDDT Date 6
Date
Transaction LBTORG Alpha 10
Originator
User ID LBUSER Alpha 10
Program ID LBPID Alpha 10
Work Station ID LBJOBN Alpha 10
Date Updated LBUPMJ Date 6

A-134 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Mapping Fields in the Batch - Alternative Address Table (F01161Z1)

Field Name Alias Type Length


Time of Day LBTDAY Date 6
Time Last Updated LBUPMT Number 6

See Also:
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Foundation Guide.

Mapping Fields for Batch Processing A-135


Mapping Fields in the Batch - Alternative Address Table (F01161Z1)

A-136 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


B
BTables Used by the Address Book System

This appendix contains the following topics:


Section B.1, "Address Book Tables"
Section B.2, "Address Book Tables for Batch Processing"
The Address Book system uses tables to store both address book and batch processing
information.

B.1 Address Book Tables


This table lists the tables used by the Address Book system:

Table Description
Address Book Master (F0101) Stores names, address numbers, search types,
and address book category code information
for an individual or company that is assigned
an address book number.
Address Book - Who's Who (F0111) Stores names, address book information, and
who's who category code information for
individuals who are associated with a
particular address book number. Also, the
stored information includes the fields that
need to be protected for data privacy.
Related Person (F01112) Stores names, personal information, and
related- person category code information for
individuals who are related to a who's who
entry.
Address Book - Phone Numbers (F0115) Stores area codes, phone numbers, and types
of phones. Also, the stored information
includes the fields that need to be protected
for data privacy.
Electronic Address (F01151) Stores E-mail and uniform resource locator
(URL) addresses associated with a who's who
entry.
Address by Date (F0116) Stores addresses, address lines, postal codes,
and effective dates for address book numbers.
Also, the stored information includes the
fields that need to be protected for data
privacy.

Tables Used by the Address Book System B-1


Address Book Tables

Table Description
Postal Codes (F0117) Stores the city, state, county, country, and
optionally, a second postal code, bulk mailing
center and carrier route for postal codes that
you enter.
Alternate Address (F01161) Stores addresses, address lines, postal codes,
and effective dates for who's who and contact
entries.
Address Organization Structure Master Stores parent numbers, child numbers,
(F0150) address numbers, and structure types.
Enhanced Parent Child (F01501) Stores parent numbers and who's who child
numbers.
Country Constants Master File (F0070) Stores country-specific address-book formats
for international mailing labels.
AB Word Search Master (F01815) Stores words that are referenced when you
search for a name.
Supplemental Database - Core (F01090) Stores user-defined information, such as
textual and statistical information.
Supplemental Database - Code (F01092)
Supplemental Database - Narrative (F01093)
Address Book Master Audit Log (F0101A) Stores a record of changes to existing address
book records and new address book records
that have been entered.
Address Book Data Permissions List Stores the permission list definitions to be
Definitions (F01138) used for Address Book Data Privacy. The
stored information includes the fields that
should be protected for data privacy.
Postal Code Address (F0118) Stores the address associated with a specific
postal code.
Activity Master (F01301) Stores the activities and tasks that are part of
the Foundation Calendar module.
Activity Master Work Table (F01301W) Stores the activities and task records including
the recurrence records that are generated
when a user inquires on an activity.
Activity-Deleted IDs for Sync (F01302) Stores the records that are deleted in
disconnected mode.
Calendar Master (F01311) Stores the calendar record and related
properties for all calendars created in the
Foundation Calendar module.
Recurrence Master (F01321) Stores the recurrence patterns for activities
and tasks.
Recurrence Exclusion (F01331) Stores the exclusions for recurrences that are
set up for an activity or task.
Action Plan (F01401) Stores the grouping of activity templates (that
is, pseudo activities) that can later be used to
create real activities.
Action Plan Activity (F01411) Stores the activity templates that are available
to be associated with action plans.
Contacts Subscription Table (F011901) Stores the contacts for which a user has
requested synchronization between the JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne server and the
Personal Information Manager.

B-2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Address Book Tables for Batch Processing

Table Description
Supplier Master (F0401) Stores supplier specific information.
Customer Master (F03012) Stores customer specific information.

B.2 Address Book Tables for Batch Processing


This table lists the tables used by the Address Book system for batch processing:

Table Description
Address Book - Interoperability (F0101Z2) Stores records that originate from an outside
(third-party) source until they become JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne address book records.
Customer Master LOB-Batch Table (F03012Z1) Stores records that originate from an outside
(third-party) source until they become JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne customer master
records.
Supplier Master - Batch Upload (F0401Z1) Stores records that originate from an outside
(third-party) source until they become JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne supplier master
records.
Batch Who's Who Information (F0111Z1) Stores who's who (contact) records that
originate from an outside source until they
become JD Edwards EnterpriseOne who's
who entries.
Batch - Related Person (F01112Z1) Stores related person records that originate
from an outside source until they become JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne related person entries
for a who's who entry.
Phones-Interoperability (F0115Z1) Stores phone numbers information for
contacts.
Batch - Electronic Address (F01151Z1) Stores E-mail and URL records that originate
from an outside source until they become JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne electronic address
records.
Batch - Alternative Address (F01161Z1) Stores alternative address records that
originate from an outside source until they
become JD Edwards EnterpriseOne alternative
address records.

See Also: Section 4.2.5, "Adding Address Book Records"

Tables Used by the Address Book System B-3


Address Book Tables for Batch Processing

B-4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


C
Delivered Workflow for JD Edwards
C

EnterpriseOne Address Book

This appendix contains the following topics:


Section C.1, "Delivered Workflow for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book"

See Also:
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Workflow Tools Guide.

C.1 Delivered Workflow for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book


This section discusses the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book workflow.

C.1.1 Activity / Task Reminder


This section discusses the Activity / Task Reminder workflow.

C.1.1.1 Description
Workflow Description
The system initiates a workflow process for the owner and the assignees of an event or
task within the Foundation Calendar system. The workflow process "sleeps" until the
selected lead time for the event or task is reached. When the lead time is reached, the
system sends a workflow message to the owner and assignees of the event or task.

Workflow Trigger
Entering or updating an event or task and selecting the reminder option with a lead
time and lead unit.

Workflow Action
The owner and the assignees of an event or task receive a message reminding them of
the activity. The message includes the address book number field 1, contact for address
book field 1, address book number field 2, contact for address book field 2, description
of the event or task, activity type, start date and time, and event or task end date/time.

C.1.1.2 Workflow Objects


System
01

Workflow Object Name


K0130040

Delivered Workflow for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book C-1


Delivered Workflow for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book

Object ID
N0130040

Event Description / Function Name


ActivityStartReminder

Sequence / Line Number


19

C-2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


D
DJD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book
Reports

This appendix contains the following topics:


Section D.1, "Address Book Reports"
Section D.2, "Address Book Reports: A to Z"
Section D.3, "Selected Address Book Reports"

D.1 Address Book Reports


Address book reports use information from these tables:
Address Book Master (F0101)
Address Book - Who's Who (F0111)
Address by Date (F0116)
You can print reports to verify accuracy and track changes to your address book
information. For some reports, an address might print multiple times depending on
the number of contact names assigned to the address.
If you mail material to individuals or companies that are set up as address book
records, you can use the Address Book system to print mailing labels. You can print
mailing labels in either Cheshire or standard format. Labels print in the format that is
specified for the country. If a country is not set up in the Country Constants table
(F0070), the labels print with the default country.
If you use effective dates, run the Effective Address Update program (R01840) to
ensure that the most current addresses print on your address book reports and mailing
labels.
See Entering Address Book Records.
To verify that your address book information is accurate, print a Full Address with
Codes report (R01403).

D.2 Address Book Reports: A to Z


This table lists the address book reports, sorted alphanumerically by report ID.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book Reports D-1


Selected Address Book Reports

D.3 Selected Address Book Reports


Some reports include a more detailed description, as well as information about
processing options. These reports are listed alphanumerically by report ID in this
appendix.

D.3.1 R01050-Copy Category Codes to Customer Master


Use the Copy Category Codes to Customer Master report to keep the customer master
category codes in sync with the changes that you make to address book category
codes. The system copies the values from the address book category codes to the
corresponding category codes on the customer master record. If you use line of
business processing, the system copies the category codes to all customer master
records for all companies unless you use data selection to specify the company.

D.3.2 Processing Options for Copy Category Codes to Customer Master


Processing options enable you to specify the default processing for programs and
reports.

D.3.2.1 Cat Code 0115


Category Code 01to Category Code 15
Enter 1 in the fields for which you want to update the category code.

D.3.2.2 Cat Code 1630


Category Code 16 to Category Code 30
Enter 1 in the fields for which you want to update the category code.

D.3.3 R01401 - Print Mailing Labels


Use the Print Mailing Labels program (R01401) to print your address labels if you have
a Cheshire machine or if you outsource your label mailing.
Print these labels on white paper stock that does not have glue on it. The Print Mailing
Labels program prints four labels across, with each label 3.2 inches wide by 0.9 inches
high. You can print a maximum of six lines, including four address lines, on a Cheshire
label. The form size for Cheshire labels is 14 7/8 inches wide by 12 inches high. Use a
Cheshire machine to cut the sheets of labels into individual labels. You then attach the
label to each mailing piece.

D.3.4 Processing Options for Print Mailing Labels (R01401)


Processing options enable you to specify the default processing for programs and
reports.

D.3.4.1 Print
1. Label Type
Specify the type of label to print. Values are:
1: Cheshire label
2: Dun/Bradstreet label (for future use)

D-2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Selected Address Book Reports

2. Cheshire Label Format


Specify the Cheshire label format. Values are:
1: Standard format
2: Include address number
3: Include phone number

3. Dun/Bradstreet Label Format (Future)


For future use.
Specify the Dun/Bradstreet label format. Values are:
1: Standard format
2: Include address number
3: Include phone number

D.3.5 R01401A - Standard Mailing Labels


Use the Standard Address Labels program (R01401A) to print your address labels if
you do your own mailing and use standard label paper. You can use a laser printer or a
dot matrix printer as follows:
For a laser printer, use Avery Laser Printer Labels #5260, which print in portrait
and are 1" by 2 5/8".
For a dot matrix printer, use Avery Pin Fed Labels #4062, which are 3 1/2" by 1
7/16".
If you use a dot matrix printer, you have the option to print 10 characters per inch
or 15 characters per inch. If you choose 10 characters per inch, the labels are
32-character labels. If you choose 15 characters per inch, the labels are 40-character
labels.
You should test your printer with a limited number of labels (for example, four labels)
before you print a full set of labels, because some dot matrix printers cannot print 15
characters per inch. If your dot matrix printer cannot do so, your printer will print one
set, then skip to a new page. When you run a test, if your printer does not skip to a
new page after a set of labels, then your printer can print 15 characters per inch.
All labels include name and address information and, optionally, address number,
phone number, or address and phone number. Labels print in the format specified for
the country. If a country is not set up in the Country Constants table (F0070), the labels
print with the default country.

D.3.6 Processing Options for Standard Address Labels (R01401A)


Processing options enable you to specify the default processing for programs and
reports.

D.3.6.1 Display
1. Print format
Specify the information to print on standard address labels. Values are:
1: Mailing labels. Print the mailing name and mailing address.
2: Mailing labels with address and phone numbers. Print the mailing name, mailing
address, address book number, and phone number.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book Reports D-3


Selected Address Book Reports

3: Mailing labels with address numbers. Print the mailing name, mailing address, and
address book number.
4: Mailing labels with phone numbers. Print the mailing name, mailing address, and
phone number.
Mailing address lines 1 through 4 appear on the labels.

D-4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Address Book Implementation Guide


Glossary

as if processing
A process that enables you to view currency amounts as if they were entered in a
currency different from the domestic and foreign currency of the transaction.

as of processing
A process that is run as of a specific point in time to summarize transactions up to that
date. For example, you can run various JD Edwards EnterpriseOne reports as of a
specific date to determine balances and amounts of accounts, units, and so on as of
that date.

back-to-back process
A process in JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Supply Management that contains the same
keys that are used in another process.

business service property categorization


A way to categorize business service properties. These properties are categorized by
business service.

contra/clearing account
A general ledger account in JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Financial Management that is
used by the system to offset (balance) journal entries. For example, you can use a
contra/clearing account to balance the entries created by allocations in JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Financial Management.

cost assignment
The process in JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Advanced Cost Accounting of tracing or
allocating resources to activities or cost objects.

cost component
In JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Manufacturing, an element of an items cost (for
example, material, labor, or overhead).

cross segment edit


A logic statement that establishes the relationship between configured item segments.
Cross segment edits are used to prevent ordering of configurations that cannot be
produced.

currency restatement
The process of converting amounts from one currency into another currency, generally
for reporting purposes. You can use the currency restatement process, for example,

Glossary-1
cXML

when many currencies must be restated into a single currency for consolidated
reporting.

cXML
A protocol used to facilitate communication between business documents and
procurement applications, and between e-commerce hubs and suppliers.

date pattern
A calendar that represents the beginning date for the fiscal year and the ending date
for each period in that year in standard and 52-period accounting.

denominated-in currency
The company currency in which financial reports are based.

detail information
Information that relates to individual lines in JD Edwards EnterpriseOne transactions
(for example, voucher pay items and sales order detail lines).

dual pricing
The process of providing prices for goods and services in two currencies.

duplicate published business services authorization records


Two published business services authorization records with the same user
identification information and published business services identification information.

facility
An entity within a business for which you want to track costs. For example, a facility
might be a warehouse location, job, project, work center, or branch/plant. A facility is
sometimes referred to as a business unit.

header information
Information at the beginning of a table or form. Header information is used to identify
or provide control information for the group of records that follows.

IServer service
This internet server service resides on the web server and is used to speed up delivery
of the Java class files from the database to the client.

local standalone BPEL/ESB server


A standalone BPEL/ESB server that is not installed within an application server.

matching document
A document associated with an original document to complete or change a
transaction. For example, in JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Financial Management, a
receipt is the matching document of an invoice, and a payment is the matching
document of a voucher.

Middle-Tier BPEL/ESB Server


A BPEL/ESB server that is installed within an application server.

nota fiscal
In Brazil, a legal document that must accompany all commercial transactions for tax
purposes and that must contain information required by tax regulations.

Glossary-2
supplemental data

nota fiscal factura


In Brazil, a nota fiscal with invoice information.
See also nota fiscal.

planning family
A means of grouping end items whose similarity of design and manufacture facilitates
being planned in aggregate.

preference profile
The ability to define default values for specified fields for a user-defined hierarchy of
items, item groups, customers, and customer groups.

production-grade file server


A file server that has been quality assurance tested and commercialized and that is
usually provided in conjunction with user support services.

pull replication
One of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne methods for replicating data to individual
workstations. Such machines are set up as pull subscribers using JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne data replication tools. The only time that pull subscribers are notified of
changes, updates, and deletions is when they request such information. The request is
in the form of a message that is sent, usually at startup, from the pull subscriber to the
server machine that stores the F98DRPCN table.

Rt-Addressing
Unique data identifying a browser session that initiates the business services call
request host/port user session.

quote order
In JD Edwards Procurement and Subcontract Management, a request from a supplier
for item and price information from which you can create a purchase order.
In JD Edwards Sales Order Management, item and price information for a customer
who has not yet committed to a sales order.

SEI implementation
A Java class that implements the methods that declare in a Service Endpoint Interface
(SEI).

Service Endpoint Interface (SEI)


A Java interface that declares the methods that a client can invoke on the service.

spot rate
An exchange rate entered at the transaction level. This rate overrides the exchange rate
that is set up between two currencies.

supplemental data
Any type of information that is not maintained in a master file. Supplemental data is
usually additional information about employees, applicants, requisitions, and jobs
(such as an employee's job skills, degrees, or foreign languages spoken). You can track
virtually any type of information that your organization needs.
For example, in addition to the data in the standard master tables (the Address Book
Master, Customer Master, and Supplier Master tables), you can maintain other kinds of

Glossary-3
three-tier processing

data in separate, generic databases. These generic databases enable a standard


approach to entering and maintaining supplemental data across JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne systems.

three-tier processing
The task of entering, reviewing and approving, and posting batches of transactions in
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne.

three-way voucher match


In JD Edwards Procurement and Subcontract Management, the process of comparing
receipt information to suppliers invoices to create vouchers. In a three-way match,
you use the receipt records to create vouchers.

two-way authentication
An authentication mechanism in which both client and server authenticate themselves
by providing the SSL certificates to each other.

two-way voucher match


In JD Edwards Procurement and Subcontract Management, the process of comparing
purchase order detail lines to the suppliers invoices to create vouchers. You do not
record receipt information.

variance
In JD Edwards Capital Asset Management, the difference between revenue generated
by a piece of equipment and costs incurred by the equipment.
In JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Project Costing and JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Manufacturing, the difference between two methods of costing the same item (for
example, the difference between the frozen standard cost and the current cost is an
engineering variance). Frozen standard costs come from the Cost Components table,
and the current costs are calculated using the current bill of material, routing, and
overhead rates.

wchar_t
An internal type of a wide character. It is used for writing portable programs for
international markets.

web service proxy foundation


Foundation classes for web service proxy that must be included in a business service
server artifact for web service consumption on WAS.

work day calendar


In JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Manufacturing, a calendar that is used in planning
functions that consecutively lists only working days so that component and work
order scheduling can be done based on the actual number of work days available. A
work day calendar is sometimes referred to as planning calendar, manufacturing
calendar, or shop floor calendar.

Glossary-4

You might also like